LightSYS2

Installation and Programming Manual

Important Notice
This guide is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions:

This guide contains proprietary information belonging to RISCO Group. Such

information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting explicitly and properly
authorized users of the system. No part of its contents may be used for any other
purpose, disclosed to any person or firm, or reproduced by any means, electronic or
mechanical, without the express prior written permission of RISCO Group.
The information contained herein is for the purpose of illustration and reference only.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Corporate and
individual names and data used in examples herein belong to their respective owners.

Compliance Statement
Hereby, RISCO Group declares that the LightSYS™2 series of central units and accessories are
designed to comply with:

EN50131-1, EN50131-3 Grade 2

EN50130-5 Environmental class II
EN50131-6 Type A, EN50136-2 and EN50131-10
UK: BS 8243:2010, PD 6662:2010, ACPO (Police)
ATS 5 for IP/GPRS; ATS 2 for PSTN
ATS EN50136-1 Category C (PSTN, GSM, IP transmission paths in parallel)
Signaling security: - Substitution security S2
- Information security I3

IMQ Notes
Certified IMQ-Security System:
RP432P000EUC, RP432GSM, ProSYS BZE, RP432EZ8, RP432EW8, RP432KP and
RP432KPP + ATS 2, option notification B
Technical alarm is not covered by EN 50131-3 (ex. fire, flood, gas, medical, foil….)
IMQ-Security System tests have been carried out only at 230Vac +10/-15%
Maximum load allowed to guarantee the autonomy without EPS (to indicate 0.58 A)
Correct nominal output voltage (to indicate 13.8 V±10%)
Maximum ripple (to indicate <50 mVpp)
Flammability class battery enclosure requested V-2 or better.

© 2017 RISCO Group, all rights reserved

Page ii
 Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction 9
What is LightSYS™2? ................................................................................................. 9
LightSYS™2 Architecture and Capabilities ........................................................... 12
LightSYS™2 Features................................................................................................ 13
LightSYS™2 Communication Methods ................................................................. 18
Channels ......................................................................................................................... 18
Reporting Destinations and Clients ............................................................................ 18
Cloud Communication ................................................................................................. 19

Chapter 2 Mounting and Wiring 23

LightSYS™2 installation steps ................................................................................. 23
Choosing the mounting location ................................................................................. 23
Wall Mounting the LightSYS™2 Box ..................................................................... 24
AC adaptor and main board ........................................................................................ 24
Main Board Wiring ........................................................................................................ 28
Main Board — Bus Connection.......................................................................... 28
Zone Inputs Wiring ............................................................................................. 30
Wiring Auxiliary Devices ................................................................................... 31
Wiring Internal Bell ............................................................................................. 32
Wiring Bell Tamper ............................................................................................. 32
Wiring Utility Outputs ........................................................................................ 33
Back Tamper (Optional)................................................................................................ 34
Connecting a telephone line to the LightSYS2 ........................................................ 35
Placing the Communication Modules......................................................................... 35
Plug-in IP .............................................................................................................. 36
Plug-in Fast Modem 2400 ................................................................................... 37
Plugs ...................................................................................................................... 38
Jumpers ................................................................................................................. 39
DIP switches ......................................................................................................... 39
Connecting Backup Battery .......................................................................................... 40

Chapter 3 Installing Bus Devices 41

Bus connection ........................................................................................................... 41
Setting Bus Accessory ID Numbers ........................................................................ 42
Installing Bus Expanders and Accessories ............................................................. 43
Keypads .......................................................................................................................... 43
Utility Outputs ............................................................................................................... 45

Page iii
 Wireless Expander ......................................................................................................... 47
1.5 and 3A Switching Power Supply Expansion Modules ....................................... 48
Digital Voice Module .................................................................................................... 53
Sounders ......................................................................................................................... 55
ProSound .............................................................................................................. 55
Lumin 8 ................................................................................................................. 56
Connecting Bus Detectors............................................................................................. 56
Single Zone Expander ................................................................................................... 57
Completing the Installation .......................................................................................... 60

Chapter 4 Installer Programming 61

Programming Methods ............................................................................................ 61
Configuration Software ................................................................................................ 61
PTM: Data Storing Device ............................................................................................ 61
LCD Keypad ................................................................................................................... 63
Keypad Programming Key Functions .............................................................. 63
Entering Text Descriptions (Labels): ................................................................. 63
Keypad Timeout .................................................................................................. 64
Accessing Installer Programming Menu ................................................................ 64
First Time Power Up ..................................................................................................... 64
Regular operation mode ............................................................................................... 65
Identifying the Connected Devices ......................................................................... 65
Automatic Setting .......................................................................................................... 65
Bus Test ........................................................................................................................... 66
Wireless device programming workflow .............................................................. 66
Step 1: Allocate a wireless expander ........................................................................... 66
Step 2: Calibrate the WL Expander ............................................................................. 66
Step 3: Allocating Wireless Device .............................................................................. 67
Bus Detectors Programming Workflow ................................................................. 67
Programming bus detectors on the main bus ............................................................ 67
Step 1: Adding Bus Detector to the Main Unit................................................. 67
Step 2: Set Bus Zone Basic Attributes ................................................................ 68
Step 3: Programming the Bus Detectors Advanced Parameters.................... 68
Programming bus detectors on a bus expander ........................................................ 68
Step 1: Adding the Bus Expander to LightSYS™2 .......................................... 68
Step 2: Adding Bus Detector .............................................................................. 69
Step 3: Set Bus Zone Basic Attributes ................................................................ 69
Step 4: Programming the Bus Detectors Advanced Parameters.................... 69
Exiting Programming Mode .................................................................................... 69
Restoring Manufacturer's Programming Defaults ............................................... 70

Page iv
Using the Installer Programming Menus............................................................... 70
Installer Programming Menu Conventions ............................................................... 70
1 System .......................................................................................................................... 71
Timers.................................................................................................................... 72
Controls ................................................................................................................. 76
Labels .................................................................................................................... 93
Sounds ................................................................................................................... 93
Settings .................................................................................................................. 95
Automatic Clock .................................................................................................. 96
Service Information ............................................................................................. 97
Firmware Update................................................................................................. 97
2 Zones ............................................................................................................................ 98
Parameters ............................................................................................................ 98
Zones: Parameters: One By One ............................................................. 98
Zones: Parameters: By Category ........................................................... 100
Label ................................................................................................ 100
Partition........................................................................................... 100
Type ................................................................................................. 100
Sound............................................................................................... 107
Termination .................................................................................... 108
Loop Response ............................................................................... 109
Advanced ........................................................................................ 109
Bus Zones Configuration .................................................................................. 110
Wireless Zones Configuration ......................................................................... 120
Testing ................................................................................................................. 124
Cross Zones ........................................................................................................ 125
Alarm confirm .................................................................................................... 128
3 Outputs ...................................................................................................................... 128
Nothing ............................................................................................................... 129
Follow System .................................................................................................... 129
Follow Partition ................................................................................................. 132
Follow Zone ........................................................................................................ 137
Follow Code ....................................................................................................... 138
4 Codes .......................................................................................................................... 141
User...................................................................................................................... 141
Grand Master ..................................................................................................... 143
Installer ............................................................................................................... 144
Sub Installer ........................................................................................................ 144
Code Length ....................................................................................................... 144
5 Communication ........................................................................................................ 145
Method ................................................................................................................ 145

Page v
 PSTN ......................................................................................................... 145
GSM .......................................................................................................... 147
Timers .............................................................................................. 147
Controls ........................................................................................... 151
Parameters ...................................................................................... 151
Prepay SIM ..................................................................................... 152
IP ............................................................................................................... 153
IP Config ......................................................................................... 153
Email ................................................................................................ 154
Host Name ...................................................................................... 154
MS Keep alive (Polling)................................................................. 154
Radio (LRT).............................................................................................. 156
Monitoring Station............................................................................................. 158
Report Type .................................................................................... 158
Accounts ......................................................................................... 161
Communications Format .............................................................. 161
Controls ........................................................................................... 162
Parameters ...................................................................................... 163
MS Timers ....................................................................................... 163
Report Split ..................................................................................... 165
Report Codes .................................................................................. 167
Configuration SW .............................................................................................. 167
Follow Me ........................................................................................................... 170
Define FM ........................................................................................................... 170
Report Type .................................................................................... 170
Partition........................................................................................... 172
Events .............................................................................................. 172
Restore Events ................................................................................ 174
Remote Control .............................................................................. 175
Controls ........................................................................................... 175
Parameters ...................................................................................... 176
6 Audio.......................................................................................................................... 178
Messages ............................................................................................................. 178
Local Announcements....................................................................................... 180
7 Install .......................................................................................................................... 181
Bus Device .......................................................................................................... 181
Bus Devices: Automatic Setting ............................................................ 181
Bus Devices: Manual Setting ................................................................. 182
Bus Devices: Testing ............................................................................... 193
Wireless Devices ................................................................................................ 195
8 Devices ....................................................................................................................... 198

Page vi
 Sounder ............................................................................................................... 201
Proximity Key Reader ....................................................................................... 207
3A Power Supply ............................................................................................... 208

Chapter 5 Using the Installer Non-Programming Menus 209

Activities Menu ............................................................................................................ 209
Follow Me ..................................................................................................................... 209
View Menu ................................................................................................................... 210
Clock Menu .................................................................................................................. 211
Event Log ...................................................................................................................... 211
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 211
Macro ............................................................................................................................ 213
Stand Alone Keyfobs ................................................................................................... 213

Appendix A Technical Specifications 214

Appendix B LightSYS™2 Accessories 218
Appendix C Wiring 222
Appendix D Library Voice Messages 225
Appendix E Report Codes 226
Appendix F Installer Event Log Messages 231
Appendix G Installer Programming Maps 241
Appendix H EN 50131 and EN 50136 Compliance 251
Appendix I Remote Software Upgrade 254

Page vii
 Table of Figures
Figure 1-1 LightSYS™2 Architecture (F/W version 3.0 or above installed) ........................... 11
Figure 1-2 LightSYS™2-supported Keypads ............................................................................ 15
Figure 2-1 Box clip release ........................................................................................................... 24
Figure 2-2 Mounting screw template ........................................................................................ 24
Figure 2-3 Placing the AC adapter with mains fuse .............................................................. 25
Figure 2-4 Placing the main panel PCB ..................................................................................... 27
Figure 2-5: Main board wiring diagram .................................................................................... 28
Figure 2-6: Main board terminal block ..................................................................................... 28
Figure 2-7: Terminal block bus connectors ............................................................................ 29
Figure 2-8: Wiring U01 for self-powered device.................................................................... 33
Figure 2-9: Perforated Back Tamper Release and Connection to PCB ............................. 34
Figure 2-10 Placing the GSM module and antenna ............................................................... 36
Figure 2-11 Placing the IP module ............................................................................................. 37
Figure 2-12 Placing the PSTN modem module ....................................................................... 37
Figure 2-13 Placing the battery and attaching the plug ...................................................... 38
Figure 3-1: Terminal block bus connectors ............................................................................ 41
Figure 3-2: Zone Expander board and mounting diagrams ............................................... 44
Figure 3-3: Zone Expander mounting location inside the LightSYS™2 box ................... 45
Figure 3-4: Utility Output Module UO4 (Showing an Example of UO4 Wiring) ............. 45
Figure 3-5: Utility Output Module E08 ...................................................................................... 46
Figure 3-6: Utility Output Module X-10 ................................................................................... 46
Figure 3-7: Wireless Expander ..................................................................................................... 47
Figure 3-8: 3A PS Module ............................................................................................................. 48
Figure 3-9: 1.5A PS Module .......................................................................................................... 48
Figure 3-10: SMPS Inside a Metal Box ....................................................................................... 49
Figure 3-11: SMPS – AC & Ground Connection ........................................................................ 51
Figure 3-12: Voice Module PCB ................................................................................................... 53
Figure 3-13: Voice Module — Listen/Talk Unit Wiring ......................................................... 54
Figure 3-14: ProSound Bus Wiring.............................................................................................. 55

Page viii
 Introduction

Chapter 1 Introduction
This chapter provides a basic introduction to the LightSYS™2 system and its architecture and
capabilities, as described in the following sections:
What is LightSYS2?, below
LightSYS™2 Architecture and Capabilities, page 12
LightSYS™2 Features, page 13

What is LightSYS™2?
LightSYS™ 2 hybrid security system offers Smartphone App control and communication
flexibility as well as your choice of wired, 2-way wireless, or RISCO Bus detectors.
• The Smartphone App transforms the security system into an appealing gadget for
home and small business owners
• 2-way wireless sounders, slim keypads and detectors ease your installation and
enhance your offering
• RISCO Bus saves you cabling and labor costs and enables remote service, as
detectors are installed in series on the system Bus and can be remotely configured
and diagnosed.
• Communication flexibility includes IP, GSM/GPRS, PSTN and Long Range Radio, all
installed within the main housing
LightSYS™2 provides monitoring and supervision for up to 50 zones total (for LightSYS™2
panels with firmware version 3.0 or above installed), in various different combinations of
wired, wireless, and bus zones. Through its 4-wire bus it can support a variety of optional
modules including: assorted keypads, proximity key readers, zone expanders, interactive
voice module, 868/433 MHz wireless expansion, supplement power supply, utility outputs
and numerous bus detectors.
LightSYS™2 features integrated multiple-path reporting, including a Cloud channel and
integrated plug in IP module for IP communication, plugin GSM/GPRS modules for
advanced cellular communication all in one box, and an IP/GSM receiver package for
monitoring stations (MS).
LightSYS™2 provides a new level of remote service and installation convenience, with unique
remote diagnostic capabilities, Auto-Install™ technology and bus test which checks
communication quality of the bus and enables pinpointing intermittent wiring faults.
For easy maintenance and scalability LightSYS™2 can be upgraded locally or remotely using
IP or Cloud communication.
Connecting the system to the RISCO Cloud enables users to benefit from the smartphone app
and the self-monitoring feature as well as the capability to control their alarm systems
remotely and the ability to arm and disarm the system via the app.
Featuring remote management, advanced communication, simple installation, and a
comprehensive range of peripherals, LightSYS™2 is the ideal hybrid solution for your
residential and small commercial requirements.

Page 9
Introduction

Live IP Video Verification Solution for LightSYS2

LightSYS2 supports VUpoint – RISCO’s revolutionary, live video verification solution for
residential and commercial installations that seamlessly integrates an unlimited number of IP
cameras for providing an unprecedented level of security and live video monitoring
capabilities to alarm receiving centres and end-users alike.

• VUpoint offers seamless integration of LightSYS2 with IP cameras

• A unique solution, offering live video verification of alarms for alarm receiving
centres, business & home owners
• Live video on-demand for business & home owners

Note: VUpoint may be added to any LightSYS 2 system connected to the

RISCO Cloud, and is not dependant on the firmware version installed.

VUpoint Outdoor VUpoint Indoor VUpoint Vandal-Proof

Bullet IP Camera Cube IP Camera Dome IP Camera

Powered by the RISCO Cloud, VUpoint enables live video streaming from IP cameras to be
viewed “on-demand” using the iRISCO Smartphone or Web application. VUpoint can be
configured so that any event—intrusion, safety or panic—can activate the IP camera.

For verification purposes, live viewing of video of events can greatly assist alarm receiving
centres in identifying costly false alarms, and enable a greater operational efficiency.

Download the iRISCO app from the Apple Store for iOS devices and the Play Store for
Android devices. For more information contact your RISCO Distributor or go to
www.riscogroup.com
This LightSYS™2 Installation and Programming Manual details how to install the
LightSYS™2 hardware and to program the LightSYS™2 main panel, as described in the
following main steps:

♦ Step 1: Mounting and Wiring the Main Panel (Chapter 2)

♦ Step 2: Identifying, Mounting and Wiring Keypads and Expansion Modules (Chapter 3)

Page 10
 Introduction

♦ Step 3: Programming the LightSYS™2 (Chapters 4 and 5)

Note:
While this manual describes all of the above steps, the section on programming the main
panel comprises the bulk of the information, as it covers all the programmable functions
that can be performed using the keypad.

Figure 1-1 LightSYS™2 Architecture (F/W version 3.0 or above installed)

Page 11
Introduction

LightSYS™2 Capabilities
The following specs are for LightSYS™2 panels with firmware version 3.0 or above installed.
Feature Description
Zones (total) 50 max.
Wired zones 50 max.
Wireless zones (1-way and 2-way) 50 max.
Bus devices (such as keypads,
32 max.
expanders, bus detectors, sounders)
Partitions 4 max.
Groups per partition 4 max.
EOL zone termination resistance Fully selectable
Zone loop response 1msec, 10msec, 400 msec, 1 sec
User codes 30 max.
Wireless Expander modules 2 max.
Bus Zone Expander modules 4 max.
8-Zone Expander modules 5 max.
Single zone expander Multiple supported
Outputs (programmable) 4 onboard, expandable to 32 max.
Output Expander modules 6 max. (either 4 or 8 outputs each)
Power Supply modules 4 max. (1.5 A or 3 A)
Event log 500 max.
Keypads 4 wired/2-way wireless max.
Wireless keyfobs 16 multi-functional keyfobs
200 remote controls for gate control only (used
Wireless keyfobs for gate control
with a wireless expander)
Configuration Software yes
Web user interface (app) yes
Smartphone interface (app) yes
RISCO Cloud (application server) yes
Proximity key readers 8 max.
IP cameras (for video verification) Indoor, outdoor models
Follow-me numbers 16 max.
Communication PSTN, IP, GSM/GPRS, LRT, Cloud, STUadapter
MS Account numbers 4 max.
Reporting formats Contact ID, SIA with text, IP Receiver, LRTs
Additional inputs Bell tamper, box tamper
Max Current 1.5 A or 4 A
Sirens 4 max.
Automatic scheduling programs 4 max.

Page 12
 Introduction

LightSYS™2 Features
The following features are for LightSYS™2 panels with firmware version 3.0 or above
installed.

Main Panel

The main panel is the foundation of the system's operation and has the following features:
8 basic hardwired zones
4 Utility Outputs:
o 1 x relay (programmable output) (3 Amps)
o 3*100mA opto-relays
Box tamper input (normally open)
Bell tamper input (using a 2.2KΩ end-of-line resistor)
4-wire bus (RISCO bus) with "quick connector" from the main panel.
Power for the operation of an external sounder
Offers the required type of voltage for one or more electronic sirens, bells, or
loudspeakers, respectively
Supports more than 25 zone types
5 zone terminations, including: normally closed (NC), normally open (NO), end-of-
line resistance(EOL), double end-of-line resistance (DEOL), and for enhanced mode
(above Grade 2) triple-end-of-line-resistance (TEOL) – for identifying detector
masking and trouble (trouble for all grades)
Configurable zone resistance
500 Event log on board
Polycarbonate plastic enclosure with built-in power supply of 1.5 A, or metal
enclosure with built-in power supply of 1.5 A or 4 A

Zone Expansion

Support for multiple wired / wireless zones

Wired zones expansion using 8-zone expanders
Bus Zone Expanders that each support multiple bus zones
Up to two wireless expansion modules (868MHz or 433MHz)
5 zone terminations, including: normally closed (NC), normally open (NO), end-of-
line resistance(EOL), double end-of-line resistance (DEOL), and for enhanced mode
(above Grade 2) triple-end-of-line-resistance (TEOL) – for identifying detector
masking and trouble (trouble for all grades)
Configurable zone resistance for EOL termination
Supports more than 25 zone types
Forced setting zone capability

Page 13
Introduction

Wireless Capabilities

Up to two wireless expansion modules (“wireless expanders”) per LightSYS™2

system, supporting:
o Up to 32 supervised wireless zones
o Up to 16 multi-function keyfobs
o Up to 200 remote controls for gate control (when used with wireless expander)
o Two utility outputs
o Rolling code technology
o Signal-jamming detection
o Programmable supervision time
o Threshold-level calibration
o Tamper detection
o Transmitter’s low battery detection
o Transmitter supervision
o Nominal center frequency: 868.65 MHz or 433.92 MHz
o Can be installed inside or outside the LightSYS™2 main enclosure
The Wireless expansion modules work with the following wireless devices:
o Smoke & heat detectors
o Door contacts/Door magnet/universal transmitter/door contact +universal
o Up to 16 rolling code keyfobs
o Up to 200 remote controls for gate control
o Double key panic keyfob
o Flood detector
o Shock detectors
o CO detectors
o Gas detectors
o Glassbreak detectors
o Internal and External PIR/PET and WatchOUT detectors

Partitions/Areas

Up to 4 independent partitions/areas
Any zone can be assigned to any partition/area
Each partition/area supports both zone sharing and cross zoning

Groups

Groups are combined zones within a partition/area that are used for partial arming.
Up to four groups of zones can be defined for each partition/area.
Group arming and setting is performed by using the function keys on the keypad,
smartphone or via the web (A, B, C, and D) or by SMS or keyfob. Each keypad key
represents a different group of zones.
Each zone can be assigned to any of the four groups
Users can arm any of the four groups individually

Page 14
 Introduction

Keypads

The LightSYS™2 can support up to four keypads, wired or wireless (1- and 2-way) with a
choice of different model styles.
RP128KC 432KP RP128KP RW132KL2P

Figure 1-2 LightSYS™2-supported Keypads

Each keypad is equipped with:
Three emergency key zones (panic, fire, and emergency)
The ability to produce a duress (ambush) code
Optional proximity tags (different part number)
Double tamper-protection (box and wall)
Internal buzzer
Audible feedback for keypad operations
Easy-to-use hot-key sequences for simple zone bypassing
A one-key quick-arm feature for both "Stay" and "Away"
In partitioned systems, keypads can be selectively assigned to specific partitions
Four function keys (A,B,C,D) can be programmed to carry a sequence of commands
With this version, LightSYS™2 now supports a slim wireless bi-directional keypad
for end-user output control and a function key (see page 199)

User Codes and Authority Levels

1 installer code
1 sub installer code
1 Grand Master code
Up to 30 user codes
8 authority levels
Installer and Grand Master Codes can be defined with 4 digits or 6 digits
Each user can be assigned with a proximity tag or keyfob

Programmable Utility Outputs

Supports additional 10 outputs (to the 4 on the main board)

4-relay, 8-transistor or 2 relay (WL expander or 3A power supply expander)
expansion output modules
Outputs operation follows system events, codes or scheduling programs

Page 15
Introduction

Output can follow up to 5 zone events (All/Any definition)

X-10 Module: The LightSYS™2 also supports the connection of an X-10 Transmitter
module to its 4-wire expansion bus. X-10 technology converts the LightSYS2's
programmable output events into a protocol understood by the transmitter module.
When triggered, this module generates activation and control signals along existing
AC premises wiring to the appropriate X-10 receiver modules, placed and connected
within the premises to control lighting and appliances. X-10 transmitter modules are
available for the LightSYS2, supporting either 8- or 16-premises receiver modules

Advanced Digital Voice Module

The Advanced Digital Voice module provides audible information about the status of your
LightSYS™2 system and enables any remote, touch-tone (DTMF) telephone to act as a keypad
for the system. The advanced digital voice module can be used in the following situations:
Upon event occurrence, such as alarm activation, the advanced digital voice module
informs you of a security situation, such as intrusion or fire, by calling you and
playing a pre-recorded event announcement. You can then acknowledge the event
and remotely operate the system.
Remotely operating the system, which includes:
o Partition arming and disarming
o Zone bypassing
o UO activation/deactivation
o Changing follow-me numbers
o Performing listen and talk options
o Recording opening messages or zone descriptors

3A or 1.5A Power Supply Expansion Module

Although the LightSYS2's main panel provides 800mA of auxiliary power (500mA for Bell),
the use of a number of additional system modules and detectors will likely exceed this
limitation. As a result, the LightSYS™2 supports the addition of up-to-4 remote switched
power supplies that each operate from AC power, connect to the bus and provide a total
current capacity of 3 Amps.
The power supply modules have connections for powering auxiliary devices and triggering
bells, electronic sirens, or loudspeakers during an alarm. Each power supply expansion
module also supports its own standby battery and is supervised for the loss of AC, a low
battery condition, tamper input, the failure of its auxiliary output power, and the loss of
sounder loop integrity.

Scheduling

Through the use of the system's built-in clock, it is possible to automate system operations at
the same time on selected days of the week or at a specific time within the subsequent 24-
hour period or during vacation periods.

Page 16
 Introduction

The system operations include:

Scheduling automatic arming and disarming (of one or more partitions).
Scheduling automatic operation of utility outputs.
Restricting users from disarming during predefined time periods

Event Logging

The LightSYS™2 has the capability of storing up to 500 significant events, including arming,
disarming, bypassing, alarms, troubles, restorals, and resets. These events are logged in order
according to date and time, and when applicable, according to zone, partition, area, user
code, keypad, etc. When appropriate, such events can be displayed on an LCD keypad or
uploaded to the MS via the Configuration Software.

Advanced Installation Tools

Auto Installation: For quick and easy installation, the system performs automatic
installation of the modules connected to the bus. The system searches for the
modules by automatically verifying their connection and operation through the bus-
scanning feature and prompts the user to approve each module connection. The auto
installation feature is performed automatically after defaulting the system or can
also be performed manually.
Self Monitoring
o The bus test enables the system to verify the connection and the operation of the
modules connected to the bus by indicating the efficiency of each one on a 0-
100% scale. Each result is individually displayed on the LCD keypad (or via the
Configuration Software).
o A watchdog feature, which periodically (every minute) and automatically
performs a comprehensive self-test and reports when operating faults are
found.
o A maintenance mode which, when selected, performs an active self-check on
many of its components.
o One-man walk testing capabilities, enabling an installer or technician to check
the operation of each contact and detector which, when tripped, produce
audible feedback and are visibly logged at the keypad from which the test was
initiated.
System programming
o Local keypad keys
o Program transfer module: Used to store the programmed configuration of any
LightSYS™2 without the need for power.
o Local/Remote Configuration Software
o Remote software upgrade over IP

Page 17
Introduction

False Alarm Reduction

In an effort to deter false alarms, the LightSYS™2 provides various programmable features,
including the following:
Cross zoning
Swinger shutdown
Audible/visual entry/exit delays
Fire alarm verification
Dialer delay before an alarm transmission
Cancel report option
Double knock
Soak test
Exit termination zone.

LightSYS™2 Communication Methods

LightSYS™2 communicates event reporting and state notification to monitoring stations or to
home owners through a variety of channels and report frameworks, both directly and
through the RISCO cloud. These same channels and frameworks can also be used to exert
remote system and panel control for purposes of programming and maintenance.

Channels
The principal channels through which LightSYS™2 communicates are:

PSTN (On-board)

IP (To activate, see page 36)

The LightSYS™2 IP module is an easy-to-add plug-in module that enables the
system to communicate over IP networks for reporting, control and programming. It
can be used as the primary communication channel, parallel channel or as a failure
back up for the GPRS/GSM or PSTN communications.

GSM/GPRS (To activate, see page 35).

The LightSYS™2 GSM/GPRS module is an easy-to-add plug-in module that enables
the system to communicate over GPRS/GSM networks for reporting, control and
programming. It can be used as the primary communication channel, parallel
channel or as a failure back up for the IP or PSTN communications.

Long Range Radio (where available)

Reporting Destinations and Clients

End-User — The end-user can use the smartphone app to full and partially alarm
the system, individual groups (if supported) and partitions and to bypass detectors.
Additional actions, available through the web interface, include quick zone bypasses
and toggling of utility outputs.

Page 18
 Introduction

LightSYS™2 supports a follow-me feature in which the system can report to a

homeowner at work, or to a business owner at home, that there has been an alarm at
a specific location by voice message over the phone, SMS, Email or smartphone app.

The GSM/GPRS module also supports two- way voice communication which has
been found to be beneficial for elderly care, allowing two way communication with
users in times of emergency

Monitoring Station — LightSYS™2 can report event packets directly and through
the RISCO cloud, in any of the supported channels, to single or multiple alarm
monitoring centers / central stations for purposes of alarm signal response and
maintenance.

LightSYS™2 supports all major monitoring station transmission formats and

protocols including ADEMCO Contact ID, SIA/IP and SIA level 1 with text over
PSTN. Reporting can also be done via IP/GPRS, and over voice, SMS or GPRS using
the RISCO IP Receiver software.

Installer — As per system programming, installers can receive follow-me reporting

like that of the end-user (see Chapter 5 Using the Installer Non-Programming Menus).

Similarly, installers can connect remotely to the panel for purposes of configuration,
diagnostics, maintenance and testing using RISCO’s Configuration Software through
any of the above channels directly or through the cloud.

Cloud Communication
RISCO Cloud is a proprietary application server which enables RISCO’s users and partners to
enjoy the advanced features offered with several RISCO Group products.
By maintaining an “Always On” connection to the intrusion panel via IP or GRPS, RISCO
Cloud enables end users with self monitoring capabilities through Smartphone & Web
Applications, and monitoring stations with more robust and redundant communication to
their clients install base, to perform remote control and diagnostics. Additionally, installers
can benefit from the seamless cloud connection (or directly via IP/GPRS/GSM) in
communication with the panel using RISCO’s Configuration Software, for purposes of:
Configuration
Diagnostics
Maintenance
Testing

Page 19
Introduction

Self Monitoring via Smartphone & Web Applications

Self-monitoring is a growing trend among alarm system owners as it gives them full
control of their systems with or without the added cost of central monitoring stations.
LightSYS™2 security system enables end-users to be always connected and always in
control of their system from anywhere in the world.

Smartphone App:
Home and small business owners can now enjoy the iRISCO Smartphone App for
smart and easy control of their LightSYS™2 system. The revolutionary app enables
users to arm/disarm the system on-the-go, view a history of events, activate home
automation devices, bypass detectors, and view the system’s status and history, and
much more. Available for iPhone, iPad and Android.

Web Application:
RISCO Group’s web application enables home and small business owners to
monitor, control and configure their LightSYS™2 system via a web browser. In
addition to the capabilities of the iRISCO Smartphone app, users can use the web
application to register their system, add users and more. The application is powered
by the RISCO Cloud server at www.riscocloud.com

Page 20
 Introduction

Cloud Communication Route

RISCO Cloud institutes new communication route between the panel and the CMS more
robust and redundant than ever before wither via IP or GPRS communication channels.

The cloud is available either as a private server or hosted by RISCO (RISCO Cloud).

Backup Mode

Page 21
Introduction

Parallel Mode

The cloud communication configuration and capabilities are as follows:

Note:
RISCO Cloud is not IMQ certified.

Page 22
 Mounting and Wiring

Chapter 2 Mounting and Wiring

This chapter covers the installation and wiring of the LightSYS™2 main unit. Due to its
modularity, the specific component assembly will depend on your system configuration. The
following assembly is presented in the recommended order.

LightSYS™2 installation steps

The following workflow illustrates the recommended method for installing the LightSYS™2.
A detailed description is provided in the following sections of the manual.
1. Create an installation plan.
2. Mount the LightSYS™2 to the wall.
3. Plug in the AC adaptor and main board inside the LightSYS™2 enclosure.
4. Wire the main panel (zones, outputs etc.).
5. Connect telephone line.
6. Plug in communication modules.
7. Allocate and connect bus expansion modules.
8. Set dipswitches and jumpers on the main board and on the various expanders.
9. Connect backup battery and AC power.
10. Perform automatic setting and complete system programming.

Choosing the mounting location

Before you mount the LightSYS2, study the premises carefully in order to choose the exact
location of the unit for the best possible coverage and yet easily accessible to expanders and
accessories and prospective users of the alarm system. Among the mounting location
considerations are the following:
Centrality of location among all the transmitters.
Proximity to
o An uninterrupted AC outlet.
o A communication (telephone/internet) outlet.
Distance from sources of interference, such as:
o Direct heat sources
o Electrical noise such as computers, televisions etc.
o Large metal objects, which may shield the antenna.
Alarm location effectiveness for hearing part arming mode annunciation
Dryness
(In case you installed GSM / GPRS module before mounting the system into the
desired position) Ensure a good signal of the GSM network (Advisable to have a
level of at least 4 out of 5).
Note:
For wiring distance and grounding placement considerations, refer to Appendix A Technical
Specifications

Page 23
Mounting and Wiring

Wall Mounting the LightSYS™2 Box

The LightSYS™2 is housed in a state-of-the-art plastic enclosement, consisting of back and
front panels and featuring a plastic click-mounting for all internal components.

 To prepare the wall for box mounting

1. Separate the sub-assemblies by pressing the circular locking plastic brackets
on either side to release the front cover.

Figure 2-1 Box clip release

2. Hold the mounting bracket against the wall as a template and mark the
locations for the mounting holes (4 mounting holes and an additional
optional hole for securing the tamper protection bracket item).

Note: For mounting the LightSYS2 inside a

metal enclosure (RP432BM, RP432BM1) refer to
the instructions supplied with the box.

Figure 2-2 Mounting screw template

3. Drill the desired mounting holes and place the screw anchors.

AC adaptor and main board

The LightSYS™2 is powered by an AC/DC Adaptor 100-240V 50/60Hz 14.4V—1.5A.
Caution:
AC wiring should be done by a certified electrician
1. Connection to AC must be permanent and connect through the mains-
fuse terminal block (see Figure 2-3 below):
A. Affix AC adapter as per standoffs.

Page 24
 Mounting and Wiring

B. According to the location of the electrical and communication

outlets, remove the knockouts to allow cable and wire passage for
routing through the right or left-side (default) knockout exit.
C. Do not connect AC power at this point of the installation.

Figure 2-3 Placing the AC adapter with mains fuse

Note: 1.5A PS can be mounted inside either the plastic enclosure RP432B or the metal box
RP432BM. 4A PS can be mounted only in the metal enclosure RP432BM1.

Page 25
Mounting and Wiring

Caution:
• When the main panel is powered on, mains voltage is present on the
main PCB.
• To prevent risk of electric shock, disconnect all power (AC transformer
and battery) and phone cords before servicing.
• Under no circumstances should mains power be connected to the PCB
other than to the main fuse terminal block.
• A readily accessible disconnection device shall be incorporated in the
building installation wiring.
• For continued protection against risk of fire, replace fuses only with
fuses of the same type and rating.
• Install the socket-outlet near the equipment in an easily accessible
location.
• Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Replace only
with the same type and manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries in
accordance with the manufacturer instructions

Note:
PS by 4A in metal box is not IMQ certified.

Page 26
 Mounting and Wiring

2. Place the main panel PCB on its four mounting standoffs and secure it,
as per Figure 2-4

Figure 2-4 Placing the main panel PCB

3. Wire all require expansion modules as described in Chapter 3 Installing Bus

Devices.

Page 27
Mounting and Wiring

Main Board Wiring

The LightSYS™2 main board provides plugs, connectors and peripheral module interfaces for
all the principal functional expanders. In addition, its terminal connector block offers
unparalleled ease and access to the full range of alarm functionality and the board includes
communication ports for sound and digital data throughput

Figure 2-5: Main board wiring diagram

Main Board — Bus Connection

Figure 2-6: Main board terminal block

The set of four terminals on the left of the terminal block represent the expansion bus. These
terminals support the connection of keypads and expansion modules. The connections are
terminal-to-terminal with color-coded wires, as follows:
AUX RED: +12V DC power BUS YEL: Yellow data
COM BLK: 0V common BUS GRN: Green data
Connect any/all keypads and expanders necessary for the installation using the bus
connections. (Refer to the table of gauge sizes in Appendix A Technical Specifications.)

Page 28
 Mounting and Wiring

Maximum Current Flows

Figure 2-7: Terminal block bus connectors

Page 29
Mounting and Wiring

Notes:
1. The parallel wiring system supports parallel connections from any point along the
wiring.
2. The maximum wire run permitted is 300 meters (1000 feet) for all legs of the bus.
3. In case of bus communication problems, connect two 2.2KΩ resistors, one at each end of
the data bus terminals, between the green and yellow wires.
4. If connecting remote power supplies, do NOT connect the Red wire (+12v) between
the Power Supply Unit and LightSYS™2.
5. For long cable runs, please use the correct cable as stated in Appendix A Technical
Specifications

Zone Inputs Wiring

The following diagrams illustrate the various zone EOL resistance values – for relay
detector connections at the main unit or via wired zones expanders and possible 4-wire
smoke detector.
N O RM ALLY CLO SED N O RM ALLY O PEN ZO N E EN D O F LIN E Z O N E DO UBLE EN D O F LIN E
ZO N E CO N FIG URATIO N EN D O F LIN E ZO N E
CO N FIG URATIO N (N .C CO N TACT) ZO N E CO N FIG URATIO N
(N .O CO N TACT)
zone com zone com zone com zone com
zone com

2.2 K 2.2 K 2.2 K

2.2 K

ALARM
ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM TAM PER
DETECTO R DETECTO R DETECTO R DETECTO R DETECTO R

Notes:
1. For a zone with a tamper switch, you can use a double end-of-line resistor to save
additional main panel connections.
2. It is recommended that you use an end-of-line resistor at the far end of each hardwired
zone (16 x 2.2K resistors are supplied).
3. In the LightSYS™2 you have the ability to define separately the end-of-line resistance of
the zones on the main unit and of the wired zones for each eight-unit expander block
(Quick key ). Selection is done by the software with the following available
options:
4. For enhanced mode (above Grade 2) , triple end-of-line termination is supported to
identify detector masking and trouble (trouble for all grades)

Page 30
 Mounting and Wiring

Wiring Auxiliary Devices

Use the Auxiliary Power AUX (+) COM (-) terminals to power PIRs, glass-break detectors
(4-wire types), smoke detectors, audio switches, photoelectric systems and/or any device
that requires a 12V DC power supply.
Notes:
• If the auxiliary outputs are overloaded (exceed 800mA) and are shut down, you must
disconnect all loads from the outputs for a period of at least 10 seconds before you
reconnect any load to the auxiliary outputs.
• LightSYS™2 supports 4-wire smoke detectors. To connect a 4-wire smoke detector or
device that requires resetting after an alarm condition, connect the auxiliary power
AUX and output terminals. Use a power supervision relay to supervise the 4-wire
smoke detectors. Loss of power to the detector(s) de-energizes the relay, causing a
break in the zone wiring and a “Fire Fault” message at the panel. Remember to define
the Output as Switched Auxiliary.
• In addition, when connecting a 4-wire smoke detector, observe the wiring guidelines
mentioned in the previous sections, along with any local requirements applicable to
smoke detectors, as per the following diagram:

• To prevent a possible drop in voltage due to current requirements and distances

involved, make sure to use the appropriate wire gauge (refer to the table of gauge sizes
in) Appendix A Technical Specifications.
• To increase your power supply when employing multiple auxiliary devices, you can
use the optional power supply expansion module (refer to the Wiring Power Supply

Page 31
Mounting and Wiring

Expansion Modules section, page 48)

Wiring Internal Bell

The Bell/LS terminal provides power to the internal siren. When connecting an internal
sounding device, pay attention to the polarity.
It is important to position the BELL/LS DIP switch SW1 correctly (see p.39). The position
varies depending on the type of internal siren.
A maximum of 500mA may be drawn from this terminal.
Note:
To avoid bell loop trouble, if no connections are made to an internal siren, use a 2.2KΩ
resistor in its place.

Wiring Bell Tamper

Connect the bell tamper to the BELL TMP and COM terminals on the main panel using
2.2KΩ resistor in serial.
Important:
If you DO NOT use the terminal TMP BELL, remember to connect a 2.2KΩ resistor
(Resistor colors: Red, Red, Red) between TMP and COM.

+ BELL: To connect to the self

activated bell’s (SAB) positive hold
off input.
- LS: To connect to the SAB negative
hold off input.
BELL TMP: To connect to the bell
input of the SAB Unit.

Page 32
 Mounting and Wiring

Wiring Utility Outputs

The LightSYS2 utility outputs support a variety of power-line device activation,

whether resulting from: time dependency, external input, or device sensor. As detailed
in Chapter 4, 3 Outputs, you can program customized device activation powerfully
and granularly.
For additional details, see page 45.

 To wire Utility Output 1:

Utility output 1 can be used to activate a self-powered siren or any other self-
powered device.

Figure 2-8: Wiring U01 for self-powered device

 To wire Utility Outputs 2-4:

Connect the device to the UO's as illustrated below:

Page 33
Mounting and Wiring

Back Tamper (Optional)

The back tamper switch is an optional feature that provides an extra safeguard. In the event
that the LightSYS™2 is removed from the wall, the screw causes the perforated section of the
plastic and attached tamper mechanism metal plate to break and remain attached to the
wall. As a result, the back tamper switch is released and an alarm is generated. For this
feature to operate:
1. Slide the tamper mechanism (from the right) onto the standoffs and click into place.
The metal lip extends to the screw mounting hole.
2. When the LightSYS™2 housing box is screw attached to the wall, also screw attach
the tamper hole and abutting tamper metal lip (to the mounting bracket you
inserted in step 2 on page 24)
3. Attach the tamper wires to PCB main board PLUG2 (see below, Figure 2-9).
The back tamper switch is located on the rear side of the back panel and is constantly
depressed by the section shown in Figure 2-9
Note:
If the installation does not include the tamper mechanism, set DIP switch 4 to ON. (see
page .39).

Figure 2-9: Perforated Back Tamper Release and Connection to PCB

Page 34
 Mounting and Wiring

Connecting a telephone line to the LightSYS2

1. Connect the incoming telephone line to the main panel's PHONE - LINE
terminals.
2. Connect any telephone on the premises to the PHONE - SET terminals or to
the optional PLUG3 jack RJ11 .
Note:
To ensure line seizure capability, and comply with FCC part 68 regulations, the equipment
must be connected directly to the Phone company lines ('CO'). Whether connected via RJ11
or terminal block, the line port must be connected to the CO lines without any other
phones or other telecom equipment between them. Other telecom equipment can be
connected only after (in series) the alarm.

Installing Plug-In Communication Modules

CAUTION:
Before installing any plug-in communication or audio module, first remove electrical
power from the main panel and disconnect the main panel’s backup battery. Failure to do
so may result in damage to system components

GSM Modules
The procedure for installing the GSM/GPRS (2G) module is the same procedure as for the
GSM 3G module. Refer to the assembly instructions packaged with each GSM module (as
well as the box / enclosure) for specific, detailed installation information.

 To install a GSM Module

1. Ensure the main panel is powered-off.
2. Mount the GSM module by placing its plastic standoffs onto the
corresponding holes on the PCB. See the example below in Figure 2-10.
3. Insert the dedicated SIM card and, if required, enter its PIN (or if not needed, disable
the PIN in advance by placing it in a cell phone and then disabling the PIN).
Notes:
• Ensure that you remember the PIN code. Usually, after three wrong
attempts (recognized by the SIM card) to enter a PIN number, the SIM card
will lock. You will have to contact your local cellular provider to unlock the
SIM card.
• Important: Do not install SIM card while power is applied to the
LightSYS™2.
• Do not touch SIM Card connectors (circuitry)! Doing so may release an
electrical discharge that could damage the SIM card.
• Once the SIM card is placed it is recommended to test the operation of the
SIM by conducting a call and testing the GSM signal strength. For more
information refer to the programming menus of the GSM menu

Page 35
Mounting and Wiring

4. Ensure the antenna is attached onto its connector on the GSM module, and then slide
the antenna into place on the box / enclosure housing according to the instructions
packaged with the specific box / enclosure being used (one example is illustrated
below in Figure 2-10):

Note: For mounting GSM module inside a metal enclosure, refer to the instructions supplied with

the box

Figure 2-10 Placing the GSM module and antenna

IP Module

The IP module provides data communication over TCP/IP.

 To install the IP Module

1. Ensure the main panel is powered off.
2. Place the IP module (mounted on its standoffs) as illustrated in
Figure 2-11
3. Connect the incoming LAN cable in order to enable IP Communication.

Page 36
 Mounting and Wiring

Make sure that the cable is connected to the network

Figure 2-11 Placing the IP module

Fast Modem (PSTN Modem Module)

The PSTN modem module enables 2400 baud PSTN communication.

 To install the Fast Modem (PSTN Modem) Module:

1. Ensure the main panel is powered-off.
2. Place the optional Fast communication modem (mounted on its standoffs)
as illustrated in Figure 2-12.
3. For PSTN communication, ensure the telephony wiring is connected to the
PHONE terminal block on the main panel PCB (see Connecting a telephone
line to the LightSYS2, page 35).

Figure 2-12 Placing the PSTN Figure 2-13 Placing the battery and
modem module attaching the plug

Page 37
Mounting and Wiring

Connecting the Backup Battery

Main Unit DIP Switch and Jumper Setting
Plugs

Plug Description Function

PLUG 1 Bus Connector Bus 4 pin plug for easy connection to the bus
PLUG 2 Back Tamper Used for the connection of the optional back tamper
PLUG 3 Telephone Used for a local telephone connection (same as the
PHONE SET terminal)
PLUG 4 Voice Used to connect the Advanced Digital Voice
Module (RP432EV) to the LightSYS™2.
Connect the Voice module to the VOICE connector
(PLUG 4) on the main panel via the supplied cable. This
connector transmits signals from the voice module to
the telephone line during remote communication and is
essential for normal operation of the voice module.

PLUG 5 RS-232 Used for local communication with the configuration

software.
PLUG 6 Use this outlet for connection to the RISCO supplied
certified AC to DC adaptor.
Note: the Adaptor outgoing power cord can be cut for
the plug and attached to the supplied terminal block
fuse as per your local wiring requirements.
Additionally, input wiring can also be connected to
LightSYS™2 through the neighboring (–) and (+)
terminal block connectors.
PLUG 7 Battery Use this outlet to connect to the backup battery (not-
supplied), of 12 volts and 7Ah

Page 38
 Mounting and Wiring

Jumpers

The LightSYS™2 is equipped with an internal jumper to configure battery discharge

protection. Use the following table to set the jumper.

Position Function
Battery Discharge Protection is disabled; The battery may be
totally discharged during continuous AC failure, thus battery
replacement may be required (no deep discharge protection).
Note:
In this position, the LightSYS™2 will start to operate from a
battery power supply whether it is connected to the Mains or
(Default)
not.
Battery discharge protection is activated: If a continuous AC
power outage occurs, the LightSYS™2 automatically disconnects
the battery when its backup battery voltage drops below 10.05
VDC, in order to prevent "deep discharge” that may damage the
battery.
Note:
In this position, the LightSYS™2 will not start to operate from a
battery power supply, unless connected to the Mains first.
ON

Factory
Default
DIP switches 1 2 3 4

DIP Switch SW1 Status

1: Bell ON: Bell: For bell or electronic siren with a built-in siren driver.
OFF (Default): For loudspeaker without a built-in sound driver.
2: Default ON: Resets installer, sub-installer and grand master codes to their
default factory values and bypasses main unit front tamper
alarm.
OFF (Default): Codes preserve their set values.
3:Extern - Back ON: Back tamper bypass is in effect. Use this setting during
Tamper Bypass programming and if no back tamper has been connected to
PLUG 2.
OFF (Default): No tamper bypass is in effect
4: Intern. Front ON: Front tamper bypass is in effect. Use this setting when the
Tamper Bypass LightSYS™2 is installed inside the metal enclosure RP432BM1.
OFF (Default): No tamper bypass is in effect. Use this option
when back tamper is connected to the system
* The settings of dipswitches 3 and 4 as described in this table are relevant only for LightSYS™2
RP432M00000B and later

Page 39
Mounting and Wiring

Connecting Backup Battery

Insert the backup battery into its place and connect the leads to the main panel battery,
PLUG7 (p. 38).

Notes:
• The main panel is designed to work with an approved 12 VDC, 7 Amp-hour
sealed lead battery as a backup for the primary power supply in time of main
power failure.
• The main panel is designed with reverse polarity protection on the battery
charging circuit. However, prolonged improper connection of the battery to the
main panel will result in damage.
• The battery is not supplied with the LightSYS™2.
• The LightSYS™2 Rechargeable battery should be charged for at least 24 hours.
• Battery is checked every 1 minute.
• There is a risk of explosion if a battery is replaced with an incorrect type.
• Dispose of used batteries according to the proper instructions.
• Battery in product shall be replaced every 3-5 years. No maintenance is needed.
• The power should remain disconnected until all connections have been made
and checked for accuracy
• Use the internal jumper (Jumper 1) to configure battery discharge protection. See
page 39.

Page 40
 Installing Bus Devices

Chapter 3 Installing Bus Devices

This chapter documents Installing Bus Expanders, p.43, including:
Keypads, page 43
, Zone Expander, p. 43
Utility Outputs, p. 45
Wireless , p. 47
1.5 and 3A Switching Power Supply, p. 48
Sounders, p. 55
Connecting Bus Detectors, p. 56
Single Zone Expander, p. 57.
For detailed information of each device refer to the manual supplied with the product.

Bus connection
Each bus device has 4 bus terminals. The connections are terminal-to-terminal with color-
coded wires, as follows:
AUX RED: +12V DC power BUS YEL: Yellow data
COM BLK: 0V common BUS GRN: Green data
Connect each bus device necessary for the installation using the bus connections.

Figure 3-1: Terminal block bus connectors

Notes:
1. The parallel wiring system supports parallel connections from any point along the
wiring.
2. The maximum wire run permitted is 300 meters (1000 feet) for all legs of the bus.
3. In case of bus communication problems, connect two 2.2KΩ resistors, one at each end
of the data bus terminals, between the green and yellow wires.
4. If connecting remote power supplies, do NOT connect the red wire (+12v) between
the power supply unit and LightSYS™2.
5. For long cable runs, please use the correct cable as per Appendix A Technical Specifications

Page 41
Installing Bus Devices

Setting Bus Accessory ID Numbers

For most devices, a DIP switch number must be set to identify its ID category number.
Devices are split into ‘Families’. Each ‘Family’ of devices has sequential identification
numbers which are set by the DIP switches. Before setting power on, define each module’s ID
number by setting the DIP switches as follows:
DIP switches ID DIP switches
ID
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
01 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 17 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
02 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 18 ON OFF OFF OFF ON
03 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 19 OFF ON OFF OFF ON
04 ON ON OFF OFF OFF 20 ON ON OFF OFF ON
05 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 21 OFF OFF ON OFF ON
06 ON OFF ON OFF OFF 22 ON OFF ON OFF ON
07 OFF ON ON OFF OFF 23 OFF ON ON OFF ON
08 ON ON ON OFF OFF 24 ON ON ON OFF ON
09 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 25 OFF OFF OFF ON ON
10 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 26 ON OFF OFF ON ON
11 OFF ON OFF ON OFF 27 OFF ON OFF ON ON
12 ON ON OFF ON OFF 28 ON ON OFF ON ON
13 OFF OFF ON ON OFF 29 OFF OFF ON ON ON
14 ON OFF ON ON OFF 30 ON OFF ON ON ON
15 OFF ON ON ON OFF 31 OFF ON ON ON ON
16 ON ON ON ON OFF 32 ON ON ON ON ON

Notes:
• Most accessories have four DIP switches, while bus detectors have five DIP switches
• IDs 9–32 are only available for bus detectors.
• If a DIP switch is changed on any device, it is necessary to shut down the device’s
power and then re-power it.
The first module in each category is defined as ID= 1.
Families that have sequential ID numbers are:
Wired keypads
Zones: bus zones and zone expansion modules (8 zones expander, bus zone
expander, single zone expander, wireless expander)
Output expansion modules
Power supplies: 1.5 A, 3A
Bus sirens

Notes:
1. The main unit can support a maximum load of 1.4 Amp. If more current is
required, install additional power supply modules (3 Amp max.).
2. On 3 Amp supervised power supplies and on the wireless expander, there are
two programmable outputs. These programmable outputs belong to the ‘Output’
family. These outputs have dedicated DIP switches that identify the OUTPUT ID.

Page 42
 Installing Bus Devices

Device Type Max.

Total
8-Zone Expanders 5
Bus Zones (bus detectors) 32
WL Zone Expanders 2
Bus Zone Expanders 4
Output Expanders 6
Keypads 4
4A Power Supply 4
Bus Sirens (ProSound / Lumin8) 4

Installing Bus Expanders and Accessories

Keypads

The LightSYS™2 supports several types of keypads. Up to 4 bus keypads can be assigned to
the LightSYS™2 as displayed on page 15

To install LightSYS™2 bus keypads

1. Open the keypad cover
2. Set ID DIP switches
3. Connect the keypad to the bus.
4. Set the back tamper switch ( Only in model RP128KP)
5. Adjust the brightness and contrast of the LCD keypad using a trimmer located
next to the dipswitches. (Model RP128KCL). In models RP128KP and RP432KP it
is done by pressing and holding [OK].
6. Close the keypad

Notes:
• Before mounting the keypad, test the keypad communication with the system.
• Adding the keypad to the system can be done remotely using the Configuration
Software.

For installation and allocation instructions for RW132KL2P 2-Way WL slim keypad, see page
66, Zone Expander

The LightSYS™2 Zone Expander (model RP432EZ8) enables you to expand with up to three
additional 8-zone expander boards (for a total of 32 sensor devices) connected to your
LightSYS™2 security system.

Page 43
Installing Bus Devices

Figure 3-2: Zone Expander board and mounting diagrams

 To install the 8-zone expander
1. Set DIP switches as follows:
Switch Description
Switch 1-5 Defines the Zone Expander ID number.
Switch 6-7 Not Applicable
Switch 8: Tamper bypass Instead of a short between the TMP/COM
terminal block
2. Wire the zone expander to the bus
3. Wire the zones terminals as follows:
a. Connect up to eight hardwired zones, using twisted-pair or 4-conductor cable
wiring.
b. Connect each zone to the appropriate Zone (Z) terminal and its related COM
terminal. Each pair of zones shares a COM terminal. For example, Z1 and Z2
share a COM terminal, as do Z3 and Z4, and so on.
N O RM ALLY CLO SED N O RM ALLY O PEN ZO N E EN D O F LIN E ZO N E DO UBLE EN D O F LIN E
ZO N E CO N FIG URATIO N EN D O F LIN E ZO N E
CO N FIG URATIO N (N .C CO N TACT) ZO N E CO N FIG URATIO N
(N .O CO N TACT)
zone com zone com zone com zone com
zone com

2.2 K 2.2 K 2.2 K

2.2 K

ALARM
ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM TAM PER
DETECTO R DETECTO R DETECTO R DETECTO R DETECTO R

Page 44
 Installing Bus Devices

4. Supply power to auxiliary devices. Refer to Wiring Auxiliary Devices, p. 31)

Note:
The RP432EZ8 enables to define the end-of-line resistance of its zones. Selection is done
through the Quick key programming: .

5. Mount the zone expander in either of the LightSYS™2 box left-slots:

Figure 3-3: Zone Expander mounting location inside the LightSYS™2 box

Utility Outputs
The LightSYS™2 utility outputs support a variety of device activation, based on
periodicity or system event. As detailed in Chapter 4, Using the Installer Programming
Menus  Outputs , you can program customized device activation powerfully and
granularly.

Figure 3-4: Utility Output Module UO4 (Showing an Example of UO4 Wiring)

Page 45
Installing Bus Devices

Figure 3-5: Utility Output Module E08 Figure 3-6: Utility Output Module X-10

Notes:
Outputs on module EO8:
Current consumption: 25 mA, typical / 30 mA, maximum;
Contacts; 12V Open Collector, Active Pull-Down, 70 mA, maximum
Outputs on module EO4:
Current consumption 25 mA, typical / 140 mA, maximum;
Contact rating: 5 A / 24V DC.

 To install the utility output expanders:

1. Set the output expander ID using the ID DIP switches.
2. Wire the UO expander to the bus.
3. Connect the devices to the output terminals as follows:
a. UO4 – Relays (see Figure 2-8 and Figure 3-4)
b. UO8 – Open collectors:

c. X10:
i. Connect an RJ25 cable (4-wire telephone cable) between the RJ11 connector
on the X-10 module and the X-10 transmitter.
ii. Plug the X-10 transmitter into the AC power.
iii. Plug the X-10 receiver into the AC power close to the device that will be
operated.
iv. Connect the X-10 receiver to the device

4. Mount the Utility Output Expansion Modules in the main panel cabinet,
depending on space availability or in a separate cabinet (see Figure 3-3) .
5. If the Utility Output expansion module is mounted in a separate cabinet you can
use the TAMP and COM terminal to tamper the cabinet, as follows:

Page 46
 Installing Bus Devices

Connect one (or more) normally open (NO) momentary-action pushbutton

switches in a series between the TAMP and COM terminals in order to short-
circuit these terminals while the cabinet door is closed.

Note:
It is not necessary to use a tamper switch if another module sharing the same
cabinet is equipped with one.
Do NOT use an End-of-Line Resistor in the tamper switch circuit.
If a tamper switch is not used, connect a wire jumper between the two terminals.

Wireless Expander
Up to two Wireless expanders (model WL432) can be assigned to the LightSYS™2.

WL Expander Mounting 1. Optional screw hole

Bracket (used to fasten front and
1. Screw cap back covers)
2. Upper mounting hole 2. Red LED
3. Lower mounting holes
3. Green LED
(optional)
4. Prog button
4. Wall tamper hole
5. DIP switch
6. Box tamper
7. Bus Connector
8. Terminal block
Figure 3-7: Wireless Expander
 To install the wireless expander
1. Separate the mounting bracket from the main unit.
2. Use the mounting bracket as a marking template.
3. Tear off screw caps, as needed for covering front screw hole.
4. Mount the bracket to the wall.
5. Open the wireless expander front cover.
6. Set DIP switches as follows:

Page 47
Installing Bus Devices

Switch Description
SW1- SW3 3 switches to set ID of the wireless expander.
SW4 – SW6 3 switches to set ID of the 2-output expander.
SW7: UO expander Enable/Disable
Off: Disable
On: Enable
SW8 Expander operational mode
Off : Bus mode
On: Stand alone mode
7. Wire the wireless expander to the bus.
8. Connect the devices to the outputs terminals (12VDC @ 1A max Dry Contact
Relays). See Figure 2-8 and Figure 3-4
9. Mount the wireless expander to the mounting bracket.
10. Close the mounting screw
11. Close the front cover. Use the screw cap you tore on Step 3 on the rear side.

Note:
For additional programming and configuration instructions, see 5IN1424 Wireless
Expander 432 Installation instructions

1.5 and 3A Switching Power Supply Expansion Modules

LS
ON
ON

BELL
1 2 3 4 OFF
SW1

Figure 3-9: 1.5A PS Module Figure 3-8: 3A PS Module

Page 48
 Installing Bus Devices

 To mount the 3A Switching Mode Power Supply (SMPS)

1. Mount the SMPS and the backup battery inside a metal box.
Important:
The SMPS should be serviced by qualified personnel only!
Unless serviced, the SMPS box must be closed with screws at all times!
Use only safety-approved wires in accordance with the national rules.
The SMPS is designed for indoor use only!

Figure 3-10: SMPS Inside a Metal Box

Note:
Prior to installation, calculate the total current consumption of the connected
devices in order not to exceed the power supply’s maximum current
consumption!
Important:
To prevent risk of electric shock, disconnect all power sources before servicing!
Under no circumstances should mains be connected to the PCB other than to the
main terminal block!
2. Locate the SMPS metal box in a clean and dry location, close to the mains.
3. Open the SMPS box by releasing the attaching screws.
4. When attaching the box to the wall, it is recommended to use Ø4.2mm, 32mm
length screws (DIN 7981 4.2X32 ZP)
5. Connect the incoming mains cable to the main fuse terminal block.
6. Wire the SMPS terminals as follows:
a. Connect the bus Terminals: Connect only three of the first four terminals at
the left of the Power Supply expansion module to the main panel's 4-wire
bus, as follows
Expansion Bus Terminals
COM BUS BUS
Color BLK (Black) YEL (Yellow) GRN (Green)
Important:
Do NOT make any connection to the AUX (RED) terminal from the main
panel. It is used for the outgoing bus to supply voltage to other modules.

Page 49
Installing Bus Devices

Notes:
The power supply expansion module is connected to the AC power supply.
This module, therefore, supplies power to all modules and/or keypads
located AFTER the point that it is connected to the bus.
b. Set the Tamper (TAMP COM): The power supply expansion module can be
contained in a metal cabinet. Tamper the cabinet, as follows: Connect one (or
more) normally open momentary-action pushbutton switches in a series
between the TAMP and COM terminals.
Notes:
1. It is not necessary to use a tamper switch if another module sharing the
same cabinet is equipped with one.
2. Do NOT use an end-of-line resistor in the tamper switch circuit.
3. If a tamper switch is not used, connect a wire jumper between the two
terminals.
c. BELL/LS (+) (-): Used to connect an external sounder driven by the SMPS
(bell or loudspeaker). Position the Bell/LS jumper respectively for the
connected device as described in the Jumper Settings section below.
Notes:
1. To avoid bell loop trouble, if NO connection is made for the BELL/LS
terminals, connect a 2.2KΩ resistor in its place.
2. Use a larger wire gauge if the distance between the sounder and the
SMPS is significant. Take the sounder(s) current draw into account
when selecting a wire gauge (see Appendix C, page 222).
3. Any internal siren(s) connected to the power supply expansion module
will operate exactly like the siren(s) connected to the main panel
d. AUX RED(+): Used together with the COM (-) terminal to apply power to
Aux. devices (e.g. PIRs, smoke/glass break detectors and any other devices
that require 12VDC power supply). Total current consumption from the
SMPS (Via The Aux./COM and BELL/LS terminals) is 4A
Notes:
If one or more of the AUX/BELL/LS outputs is overloaded and the SMPS
shuts down, the SMPS must be reset, using the LightSYS™2 software as
follows: (User menu > Activities > Advanced > Overload Restore option, or
enter and exit the installation-programming mode. If overload still exists,
perform manual reset as follows:
Disconnect all loads from the AUX/COM terminals for at least 10 seconds
before you reconnect any load to the AUX/COM terminals. Then perform
Overload Restore again from the LightSYS™2 user menu.
e. GROUND (Earth): Used to connect the GND terminal to the main box
ground pin (see illustration below). Use 16 AWG (at least).

Page 50
 Installing Bus Devices

f. AC: Used for connection of the AC terminals (see illustration below) to the
transformer outputs (16.5VAC/50 VA).

Figure 3-11: SMPS – AC & Ground Connection

7. Set the SMPS jumpers and the DIP switches as follows:

Mod- DIP switch Description

ule
PS/SW1-SW3 Used to set a unique ID number for the bus module for
communication purposes.
Power
PS/SW4 Enables/disables Power Supply – LightSYS™2
Supply communication.
On (up): Communication enabled.
Off (down): Communication disabled
UO/ SW1-SW3 Used to set a unique bus ID number for the UO module
located on the SMPS board.
Utility
UO/SW4 Enables/disables UO module – LightSYS™2
Output communication.
On (up): communication enabled.
Off (down): communication disabled

Note:
When PS/SW4, or UO/SW4 is Off, the ID number defined by SW1-SW3 is not
recognized by the LightSYS™2 and can be used for the connection of another
accessory of the same category. The UO/PS LED will flash since there is no
communication with the main panel.

Page 51
Installing Bus Devices

Jumper Description
Battery discharge protection
If a continuous AC power outage occurs, the SMPS
automatically disconnects the battery when its backup
Protection
ON battery voltage drops below 10.8VDC. This is done to
prevent "deep discharge” that may damage the battery.
BAT The battery may be totally discharged during continuous
Protection AC failure (no deep discharge protection).
OFF
Note:
If 2 pins configuration is selected, the battery might be damaged,
may be required.
Used to determine the SMPS mode of operation in accordance with
the sounder device connected to the BELL/LS terminals.
Bell/LS Note:
The sounder(s) connected to the SMPS operates identically to the
panel’s sounder(s).
Bell For a bell/electronic siren with a built-in siren driver,
position jumper on one pin; 12VDC is produced at the
sounder’s terminals during burglary/panic alarms. Slow
pulsing voltage is produced during fire alarm.
LS For a loudspeaker without a built-in siren driver, position
(Speaker)
jumper on both pins. The SMPS produces continuous
oscillating voltage for burglary/panic alarms and an
interrupted oscillating voltage for fire alarm.

8. Locate the battery at the bottom of the SMPS box.

9. Connect flying leads (battery connectors) from the SMPS board to the battery
terminals - (+) Red, (-) Black).

Note:
Use only lead acid battery type, rated 12V, 7-21AH (maximum) and safety
approved in accordance with the national standards!

Page 52
 Installing Bus Devices

Digital Voice Module

Figure 3-12: Voice Module PCB

 To mount the voice module:

1. Set the voice module DIP switches as follows:

Switch Description Usage
1 Bypass tamper Instead of a short with the TMP/COM terminal
block
2 OPT Not in use
3 Test Connected in parallel to all output channels
and enables to listen to all played messages
using a speaker (at least 32 Ohm) connected
between the Test Spkr and COM terminals
4 Intern Mic Select an external or internal microphone for
recording messages:
On: Recording messages from the microphone
located on the Voice module board.
Off: Recording messages from a microphone
located on Listen / Talk unit (IN1 terminal)

Page 53
Installing Bus Devices

2. Wire the voice expander as follows:

Figure 3-13: Voice Module — Listen/Talk Unit Wiring

a. Bus connection: The connection to the main bus can be made through the
terminals of the module voice AUX (RED), COM (BLK), BUS (YEL) and
BUS (GRN) as illustrated or through the bus (PLUG1) using the supplied 4-
wire cable.
b. If required, connect the Listen/Talk unit as illustrated in the diagram above.
c. Connect the Voice module to the VOICE connector on the LightSYS™2
main panel (PLUG 4) via the supplied cable, as illustrated below. This
connector transmits signals from the Voice module to the telephone line
during remote communication, and is essential for normal operation of the
Voice module.

3. Mount the Voice module inside the plastic enclosure with the LightSYS™2 main
panel in order to make a connection between the two units. (as above)
4. Mount the Listen/Talk unit. Mount the unit in a place where Listen - In
operation is to be performed.

Page 54
 Installing Bus Devices

Sounders
For detailed information of installation the bus Sounders (ProSound or Lumin 8) refer to the
manuals supplied with the products

ProSound

Figure 3-14: ProSound Bus Wiring

 To install LightSYS2-compatible bus sounders
1. Connect the siren according to Figure 3-14.
2. Set the related DIP switches for bus mode operation.
a. Set DIP switch DIP 1:SW4 should be in ON position for ProSound bus
connection
b. DIP switch DIP 1:SW5 : Defines the siren sound rhythm (ON = Slow, Off =
Fast)
c. DIP switch DIP 1:SW1-3: Set ID Bus Number. Up to 4 sirens can be
connected to the LightSYS™2.
d. DIP switch DIP 2:SW2: Set different siren sound
Notes:
 The sounder will not operate when a battery is not connected or no power
supply is connected to the PS terminals.
 After powering-up the sounder, it will not operate for a period of 20 seconds
(sound and strobe) in order to avoid accidental activation during installation.
 After powering-up the sounder, the sounder inputs (C+/C-) will cause activation
only if they have been in normal (silent) state at least for 10 seconds.
 The PROX and TRBL outputs are deactivated in bus mode configuration.
 To protect the battery against deep discharge, the battery will be automatically
disconnected below 10.5 VDC.

Page 55
Installing Bus Devices

Lumin 8

Connecting Bus Detectors

Up to 32 addressable bus detectors can be assigned to the LightSYS™2. Bus detectors can
be wired to the main bus or to a Bus Zone Expander (BZE).
For full installation instructions refer to the instructions supplied with each bus detector.

 To connect bus detectors to the main LightSYS™2 bus

1. Set the bus detector ID number (1-32) using the detector's DIP switches.
Note:
For WatchOUT, LuNAR, and WatchIN set the switch that defines the detector
operation mode to bus mode.
2. Wire the bus terminals AUX(RED), COM (BLK), BUS (YEL) and BUS (GRN) to the
LightSYS™2 bus.
Note:
For maximum operation stability, it is best NOT to exceed a total 300 meters (1000
feet) of wiring from the bus detector to the LightSYS™2 panel.

 To connect bus detectors using a Bus Zone Expander (BZE)

Important Note:
Connecting bus zones to the LightSYS™2 using the bus zone expander can only be
done using Bus Zone Expander version B and later, PN RP128EZB000B.
1. Set the BZE ID number (1-3) using the DIP switches SW1 1-3.
2. Set the BZE SW2-3 to ON position.
3. Wire the BZE terminals marked as TO PANEL to the LightSYS™2 bus.
4. Set the bus detector ID number (1-32) using the detector's DIP switches.

Page 56
 Installing Bus Devices

Note:
Do not repeat the same ID twice on the same BZE.
5. Wire each detector's bus terminals to the relevant BZE's terminals marked as TO
DEVICE.(see figure below)
Note:
For maximum operation stability, it is best NOT to exceed a total of:
300 meters (1000 feet) of wiring from the BZE to the LightSYS™2 panel.
300 meters (1000 feet) of wiring from the BZE to the last bus detector.

When connected to LightSYS™2 the Bus Zone Expanders can be defined to support 32 bus
zones. UP to 4 Bus Zones Expanders can be connected to the LightSYS™2.

Single Zone Expander

The RISCO RP128EZ01 is a Single Zone Expander that enables to connect any non-bus (relay)
detector to the RISCO bus. Using the bus connection you can ease your installation by
connecting any relay detector in parallel connections from any point along the wiring route.
In addition you can define any relay detector with one of the following zone terminations
supported by the panel: NO, NC, EOL, DEOL, TEOL.

Page 57
Installing Bus Devices

 To connect the RP128EZ01 to the LightSYS™2 bus

Note:
Up to 32 Single Zone Expanders can be installed on the LightSYS™2.

1. Set the RP128EZ01 ID number (1-32) using DIP switches 1-5.

 SW1 (1 - 5): ID switches. Defines the Single BUS Zone Expander ID number
 SW1 - 6: Not used

2. Wire the RP128EZ01 BUS wires Red, Black (COM), Yellow(BUS) and Green (BUS) to
the LightSYS™2 BUS.

Note:
For maximum operation stability, it is best NOT to exceed a total of 300 meters (1000
feet) of wiring from the BZ1 to the LightSY panel or to the BUS Zone Expander

 Wiring RP128EZ01 to the Main BUS

Page 58
 Installing Bus Devices

Wiring RP128EZ01 to BUS Zones Expanders

Notes:
When connecting RP128EZ01 to a BUS Zone Expander wire the RP128EZ01 wires to the
relevant BUS zone expander's terminals marked as TO DEVICE.

3. Wire the RP128EZ01 zone wires, Black and White, to the detector's terminals
according to the required termination.
Notes:
The Black and White wires are equivalent to zone input terminals in the
LightSYS™2.

Page 59
Installing Bus Devices

Completing the Installation

 To complete the installation

1. Mount the back panel to the wall using affixing screws
2. Connect the system to the mains power

Note:
If no back tamper is connected set SW1-4 to ON position to avoid tamper alarm

3. Close the front cover and close the locking screw

4. Upon completion of LightSYS™2 bus device installation, module wiring,

and DIP switch and jumper setting, proceed to Chapter 4 Installer
Programming and Chapter 5 Using the Installer Non-Programming Menus

Page 60
 Installer Programming

Chapter 4 Installer Programming

Programming Methods
Program the LightSYS™2 through one of three methods:
Configuration Software (Local or remote)
Program Transfer Module (PTM)
LCD Keypad

Configuration Software
A software application that enables you to program the LightSYS™2 from a PC computer. It
offers the following alternatives:
Working locally, through a portable computer connected to the LightSYS™2 via
cable
Working at a remote site, communicating with the LightSYS™2 via one of the
following options:
o A phone line and modem
o TCP/IP network using the IP Module
o GPRS using the GSM/GPRS communication module
For further information on programming the LightSYS™2 via the Configuration Software,
refer to the Configuration Software manual.

PTM: Data Storing Device

The PTM is a tiny circuit board into which the LightSYS™2 panel can transmit a copy of the
system's configuration. The PTM stores this copy and can also transmit the configuration
information back to the LightSYS™2 panel.
 To copy from a programmed main panel into the PTM:
1. Position the PTM on PLUG 1 connector on the main panel with the red LED facing
the row of terminals on the main panel. The red LED flashes slowly.
2. Position the default DIP switch 2 to the ON position.

Note:
The DIP2 should be software enabled (Installer programming Quick key 1 5 1)
3. From an LCD keypad, access the main Installer Programming menu.
4. Without making any changes, exit the main Installer Programming menu by
pressing [0]. The LED on the Program Transfer module flashes rapidly, and the
keypad displays the following:
Saving data in
PTM Accessory
5. When the LED stops flashing rapidly, the keypad beeps twice and displays the
following:
Data is saved
Please wait…

Page 61
Installer Programming

6. Then the keypad returns to the normal initial display.

7. Remove the PTM from the PLUG 1 connector
8. Position the default DIP switch 2 to the OFF position.
9. The PTM now contains a copy of the main panel's configuration

 To load the PTM’s stored configuration into a main panel:

1. Position the PTM on the PLUG 1connector on the Main with the red LED facing the
row of terminals on the main panel. The red LED flashes slowly.
2. Position the default DIP switch 2 to the ON position.

Note:
The DIP2 should be software enabled (Installer programming: Quick key 1 5 1)
3. Momentarily remove all power from the main panel (both AC and Standby Battery).
4. Restore all power to the main panel. After a moment, the LED on the Program
Transfer module flashes rapidly, indicating that the information is being copied
from the PTM to the main panel. The LCD keypad displays the following:
Please wait…
5. When the LED stops flashing rapidly, the keypad beeps once, and its display returns
to the normal initial display.
6. Remove the PTM from the bus connector PLUG 1.
7. Position the default DIP switch 2 to the OFF position.
8. From an LCD keypad, access the main Installer Programming menu.
9. Without making any changes, exit the main Installer Programming menu by
pressing [0]. The LED on the Program Transfer Module flashes rapidly, and the
keypad displays the following:
Do you want to
Save the data? Y
10. Press .
11. The keypad beeps twice and displays the following:
Data is saved
Please wait…
12. Then the keypad returns to the normal initial display, and the main panel's
configuration now matches the PTM.
13. Reset its TIME and DATE, which were lost when power was removed.

Page 62
 Installer Programming

LCD Keypad
The LCD keypad is a visual interface tool that helps you operate and program the
LightSYS™2 main panel.

Keypad Programming Key Functions

The following table describes the uses of the keypad keys during programming:
LCD KP LCD KP Touch screen Function
RW432KP RP128KCL keypad RP128KP

– 1. To enter numeric values where

required.
2. For quick key programming.
Press the number keys to access a
programming option.
3. To edit labels and names.
To go back (up) / quit / don’t save.

Enter / Save (to move into the

/
displayed menu or to save the data
that you have changed).
Press either one of these keys to
/
move back and forth through the
programming level functions.
or These keys also change the position
/
of the flashing cursor. When editing
a selection, the cursor moves to the
left or right respectively
Used to toggle displayed menu
/
options from ‘N’ to ‘Y’ and vice-
versa.
Used to increase or decrease
/
selected screen digital values.

If you do not know where you are in the menu structure, press repeatedly to return
to the main menu.

Entering Text Descriptions (Labels):

Use the keys on the keypad to produce characters according to the table below. Pressing
a particular key toggles between the characters available from that key in the sequence
listed below followed by a blank space. The LightSYS™2 permits a total of 74 characters
(letters, numbers, and symbols) for use in labeling

Page 63
Installer Programming

Key Data Sequence

1 1 . , ' ? ! " – ( ) @ / : _ + & * #
2 2 a b c A B C
3 3 d e f D E F
4 4 g h i G H I
5 5 j k l J K L
6 6 m n o M N O
7 7 p q r s P Q R S
8 8 t u v T U V
9 9 w x y z W X Y Z
0 0

Keypad Timeout

If, after 15 minutes, no entry is made to a keypad that has been placed in the Installer
Programming mode, it will produce an audible reminder, consisting of several beeps in
rapid succession, along with the following display:
Time out
Hit any Key
Pressing any key stops the beeping. To re-enter the Installer Programming menu, enter
your Installer code again and press .
Accessing Installer Programming Menu
First Time Power Up
Note:
In rare circumstances, your first time power up may be preceded by an automatic
3-minute upgrade, during which an upgrade icon ( ) and the power icon ( )will be
displayed on the keypad and the LED light will flash. Do not disconnect during this period
 To power up LightSYS™2 for the first time:
1. Disconnect all power from the main panel
2. Set DIP Switch 2 (Default) to ON position (see page 39).
3. Set DIP switches 3 and 4 to bypass unused tampers according to the relevant
enclosure to prevent tamper alarm (see page 39).
4. Connect – power to the assembled mounted unit.
5. Press the key.
6. Select language. Scroll through the options and press .
Note:
Changing the language can be done also in regular operation mode by pressing
+ simultaneously
7. Enter the Installer code (default: ) and press .

Page 64
 Installer Programming

8. Correct the time and date and confirm by pressing .

9. The system automatically enters the automatic accessories settings process option.
10. Move to the section "Identifying the connected devices" as described below.
Regular operation mode
 To enter Installer Programming mode

1. From the main display press .

2. Enter the Installer code (default: ) and press .

3. Select [1] Programming and press .

4. You are now in Installer Programming mode. Move to the section "Identifying
the connected devices" described below
Identifying the Connected Devices
Automatic Setting
EN 50131-3 Note:
The automatic setting/un-setting function is not in compliance with EN50131-3

Note:
By default, when entering Installer mode with the default DIP Switch 2 in ON position,
the system will take you immediately to Auto Settings. If the keypad is already
showing BUS SCANNING, skip to step 2 below.
1. Enter the programming key sequence  (Install, BUS Devices, Automatic).
2. Press to begin the automatic BUS SCANNING (the Auto Settings process) in
which it identifies all the devices on the bus.
3. Verify that the keypad displays all the devices you have connected. If a device does
not appear, ensure that you have given it a unique ID within its “family”.
4. Press to accept what is being displayed, to progress through configuration
screens and to advance on to the next device found.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the presence of all devices has been confirmed and all
parameters configured.
Notes:
• When adding an 8-zone expander you should define the EOL resistance
compatibility for the zone expander itself, according to the “highest” EOL level of
any relay detector you intend to connect to it. For example, if you have EOL, DEOL
and TEOL relay detectors connected to the zone expander (or if you don’t have
currently, but want to leave open the possibility of adding a TEOL relay detector to
the zone expander in the future), you will need to set the zone expander’s EOL
resistance values to TEOL – the “highest” level.

Page 65
Installer Programming

• Default resistance values for RISCO relay detectors are 2.2K Ω for EOL and DEOL
termination, and 4.7K Ω, 6.8K Ω, 12K Ω for TEOL termination.
• When adding a wireless expander, define the “Bypass Box Tamper” as YES if the
wireless expander is mounted inside the LightSYS™2 housing and not in its own.

Bus Test
The bus test (Quick key ) sends multiple test commands to each device
connected to the system to ensure reliable connectivity.
Press to begin the automatic BUS TEST in which every device is tested to report if
connections are 99% or higher.
Note:
If a low reading is experienced, check connections with the device and repeat the bus test

Wireless device programming workflow

Each of the 50 zones in the LightSYS™2 can be defined as a wireless zone (for
LightSYS™2 panels with firmware version 3.0 or above installed).

Step 1: Allocate a wireless expander

1. From the Installer menu, select  (Install, Bus Device, Manual,
WL Expander)
2. Set the expander ID (1 or 2) and using , set the type to WL and press .
3. If the expander is mounted inside the LightSYS™2 box select Y to bypass the box
tamper. Press and move to step 2.

Step 2: Calibrate the WL Expander

For successful communication, strength of the signal should be higher than the noise
threshold level, measured in a process termed calibration.
1. From the Installer menu, select  (Install, WL Device, RX Calibration)
2. Select the wireless expander and press .
3. Using the key, choose [Y] (Yes) to ‘Re-Calibrate’ the Wireless Expander and
press to confirm.
Explanation:
The calibration measurement above shows the amount of background ‘noise’ that the
expander can ‘hear’ on the same frequency as the RISCO wireless devices. This ‘noise’
could be neighboring devices of another system or other devices operating on the same
frequency nearby. These are ‘unwanted’ signals that the LightSYS™2 wireless expander
must be told ‘not to listen to’.
The threshold (set above) is the absolute minimum signal strength needed to be heard
from a wireless device in order for the expander to effectively ‘hear it’.

Page 66
 Installer Programming

Step 3: Allocating Wireless Device

Each wireless device must identify itself to the system wireless expander, in a process
termed “enrollment”.
Enrollment can be performed by sending an RF signal from each device, or by typing the
device’s unique serial code into the system. Enrollment can be done locally using the
keypad or remotely using the configuration software.
 To quick enroll by RF signal using a keypad
1. From the Installer menu, select  (Install, Wireless Devices, Allocate, By
RF)
2. Using the numeric keys, enter the desired device number and press
3. The wireless device is in learn mode. Send a write message from the your wireless
device as shown in the table below:
Wireless Device Sending Write Message
Detector/Contacts/Siren Depress the tamper switch for 3 seconds.
Smoke Detector Insert battery. Write message is sent automatically
within 10 seconds.
Gas, CO detectors Depress the test button for 3 seconds.
2 Panic ButtonKey fob Depress both buttons for at least 7 seconds.
4 Button Keyfob Depress the button for at least 2 seconds
2-way Keyfob Depress both buttons ( and ) for at least 7 seconds.
2-Way Slim Keypad Depress both buttons ( and ) for at least 7 seconds.

4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 until all required wireless device have been enrolled.
5. Continue entering the wireless device attributes section.

Bus Detectors Programming Workflow

The following section describes the flow of adding bus detectors to the LightSYS™2. Bus
detectors can be programmed to the main unit or to a bus zone expander.

Programming bus detectors on the main bus

Step 1: Adding Bus Detector to the Main Unit

Note:
If you have already performed Auto Settings, skip to Step 2 below: Assign Bus Detectors
to a Zone ID and set basic parameters.
1. From the main installer menu press   to access the bus Zone
category.

Page 67
Installer Programming

2. Press to move the cursor to the ID field.

3. Enter the bus detector ID number as set by the detector's DIP switches (01-32)
Note:
The display "(x:yy) Type: None" represent the bus detector location in the
system. In the 0:yy designation, the 0 denotes that the bus detector is on the
main unit and is not assigned to a bus zone expander. The yy represents the bus
detector ID number (up to 32) as set by the detector's DIP switches.
4. Using the arrow keys move to the Type field. Use the key to select the
detector's type.
5. Repeat steps 2 - 4 for other bus detectors.

Step 2: Set Bus Zone Basic Attributes

1. From the main Installer menu select [1] Zones > [1] Parameters > [1] One by
One .
2. Select the zone number that the bus zone was assigned to and press .
3. Configure the parameters for the relevant bus detector.

Step 3: Programming the Bus Detectors Advanced Parameters

1. From the main Installer menu select [2] Zones > [1] Parameters > [2] By
Category > [7] Advanced > [4] BZ Parameters .
2. Select the zone number that the bus zone was assigned to and press .
3. Configure the parameters for the relevant bus detector.

Programming bus detectors on a bus expander

Using bus expanders you can create a separate bus loop that is used only for the bus
detectors connected to it. The separate bus loop increases the total system security in
case a certain bus detector is sabotaged. Up to four bus expanders can be added to
the LightSYS2 (See diagram page 57)

Step 1: Adding the Bus Expander to LightSYS™2

Note:
If you already performed Auto Settings skip to Step 2 below: Assign Bus Detectors to
a Zone ID and set basic parameters.
1. From the main installer menu press    to enter the Bus Expander
menu.
2. Using the arrow and numeric keys select a bus zone expander ID.
3. Using the arrow keys move to TYPE. Use the key to select a BZE32 and
press .

Page 68
 Installer Programming

Step 2: Adding Bus Detector

Refer to section Step 1: Adding Bus Detector to the Main Unit to assign a bus detector
to the system.
Note
When the bus zone is connected to a bus expander, you should define the X in the (x:yy)
display as the bus expander ID (1,2,3 or 4). The yy represents the bus detector ID
number (up to 32) as set by the detector's DIP switches.

Step 3: Set Bus Zone Basic Attributes

1. From the main Installer menu select [1] Zones > [1] Parameters > [1] One by
One .
2. Select the zone number that the bus zone was assigned to and press .
3. Configure the parameters for the relevant bus detector.
Note:
In the zone designation XY:ZZ the X represent the Bus Expander ID as set by its dip
switches.

Step 4: Programming the Bus Detectors Advanced Parameters

1. From the main Installer menu select [2] Zones > [1] Parameters > [2] By
Category > [7] Advanced > [4] BZ Parameters.
2. Select the zone number that the bus zone was assigned to and press .
3. Configure the parameters for the relevant bus detector.

Exiting Programming Mode

1. Set SW1 – 2 (Default) to OFF position.
2. Close the main box in order to prevent Front Tamper Alarm.
3. Press repeatedly to return to ‘Main Menu’.
4. Press  > to Exit and SAVE your settings.
Note:
The system will not allow exit from the Installer mode if a ‘Tamper’ or ‘System
Trouble’ condition exists. Correct any tamper and/or system fault conditions before
attempting to exit the Installer mode.

Page 69
Installer Programming

Restoring Manufacturer's Programming Defaults

You may find it useful to be able to remove all or some changes made to the main panel's
programming and restore the default settings provided by the manufacturer.

 To restore the main panel to the manufacturer's defaults:

1. From the installer Programming menu, select:
1) System > 5) Setting> 2) Default Panel
2. Using the key select whether to also restore the system labels to the
manufacturer defaults and press to confirm.
3. Using the key to toggle Y.
4. To save your settings exit the programming mode.

Using the Installer Programming Menus

Installer Programming Menu Conventions

The following typographical conventions are used throughout this chapter:

1. Numeric keys are represented as  unless they are the final keys in a
programming sequence, in which case they are represented as 
2. Screen text is presented in déjà vu sans mono font:
System:
1)Timers 
Notes:
If the Authorize Installer system bit is defined as YES, a Grand Master code is required to
authorize the installer to enter the programming mode. In this case the grand master code
should be entered after the installer code via the grand master menu
Quick key menu options are displayed only for system-recognized modules. For non-
recognized modules, your menu option numerical display listing will be non-successive.

The installer menu consists of the following options:

System, page 71 Audio, page 176

 Zones, page 98 Install, page 181
 Outputs, page 128  Devices, page 198
 Codes, page 141  Exit
 Communication, page 145

Page 70
 Installer Programming

The column headings appear as follows:

Column Heading Description

Quick Keys A shortcut to program an option. The shortcuts are listed
in numerical sequence.
Parameter The name of the option programmed by the selection.
Default The factory default. The default values have been
carefully chosen and are suitable for most installations.
Range Where applicable, the range of possible values.

To program the system using Quick Keys:

1. Access the Installer Programming menu and select the main menu option that you
want to access.
2. Press the Quick Keys listed in sequence (from left to right) to locate the option

listed in the Parameter column and then press .

1 System
The System menu provides access to submenus and their related parameters that are used for
programming configuration settings applicable to the entire system.
After you access the System menu from the main Installer Programming menu, as described
in this section, you can access the following sub-menus:

 Timers, page 72
Controls, page 76
Labels, page 93
Sounds, page 93
 Settings, page 95
Auto Clock, page 96
Service Info, page 96
 Firmware update, page 97

Page 71
Installer Programming

 Timers
The Timers menu contains parameters that specify the duration of an action.
Access and configure the parameters in the System Timers menu, as follows:

System: Timers

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Exit/Entry Delay 1

Exit/Entry delays (Group 1).

 Entry Delay 1 30 seconds 01-255 seconds

Duration of entrance delay 1.

 Exit Delay 1 45 seconds 01-255 seconds

Duration of exit delay 1.

 Exit/Entry Delay 2

Exit/Entry delays (Group 2).

 Entry Delay 2 30 seconds 01-255 seconds

Duration of entrance delay 2

 Exit Delay 2 45 seconds 01-255 seconds

Duration of exit delay 2.

 Bell Timeout 04 minutes 01-90 minutes

Duration of the external sounder(s) during alarm.

 Bell Delay 00 minutes/seconds 00-90 minutes/seconds

The time delay before the keypad sounder and the external sounder
operate after the onset of an alarm.

Page 72
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Switch Aux Break 10 seconds 00-90 seconds

The time that the power supplied to the system's smoke detectors through
the programmable output is interrupted during a user-initiated smoke
detector reset, typically performed after a fire alarm or automatically
when a fire verification is defined in the system control. (Refer to Double
Verification of Fire Alarms, page 7979, for additional details.)
Note
This feature is supported through any programmable output that is
defined as Switch AUX .

 Wireless
Specifies the time intervals relating to the operation of the wireless
module

 Jamming Time None None, 10, 20 or

30 seconds
Specifies the period of time that the LightSYS2's wireless module
tolerates unwanted radio frequencies capable of blocking (jamming)
signals produced by the system's transmitters. Once the specified time is
reached, the main panel sends a report code to the alarm receiving center.
(Refer to Jamming Fault, page 226.)
NONE 10 SEC  20 SEC  30 SEC
NONE: No jamming will be detected or reported.
Note:
Different sounds will be produced when jamming is detected, depending
on the defined Audible Jamming time

 RX Supervise 0 0-7 Hours

Specifies how often the system expects to get a signal from the system's
transmitters. If a signal from a zone is not received during the specified
time the zone will be regarded as lost, the system will send a report code
to the monitoring station, and the system status will be "Not Ready".
Note:
0 hours disables supervision.
It is recommended to set the supervision time to a minimum of 3 hours

Page 73
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 TX Supervise 058 1-255 minutes

Specifies how often a bi-directional wireless device generates a

supervision request to the system.
If any of the accessories does not respond to the request, at least once,
during the RX Supervision time, the system will regard the accessory as
Lost.
Notes
• The device will generate the supervision message according to the
time defined.
Important: The RX Supervision time should be higher than the Tx
Supervision time in order to eliminate false lost event.

 Service Mode 020 1-255 minutes

The time period that all tampers (main unit and accessories) can be opened
for purposes of battery replacement without triggering a tamper alarm.

 AC Off Delay 30 000-255 minutes

In the case of a loss of AC power, this parameter specifies the delay period
before reporting the event or operating the programmable output. If the
delay time is set to zero, there will be no delay period.

 Guard Delay 30 01-99 minutes

Specifies the time period that the system will be unset after an authorized
user enters a Guard code.

 Swinger Limit 00 00-15 times

A swinger is a repeated violation of the same zone, often resulting in a

nuisance alarm and usually due to a malfunction, an environmental
problem, or the incorrect installation of a detector or sensor.
This parameter specifies the number of violations of the same zone reported
during a single armed period, before the zone is automatically bypassed.
Notes
• Enter 00 to disable the swinger shutdown.
• EN 50131 compliance with swinger limit of no more than 10 times

Page 74
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Redial Wait 30 0–255 seconds

The number of seconds between attempts at redialing the same phone

number.
Applies to the MS Retries parameter, described on page 163 and FM
Retries described on page 176.

 Last Exit Sound 10 01–255 seconds

Defines the final seconds of the Exit Time for which the beep sound will
change (keypads), indicating that Exit Time period is about to expire.

 Buzzer at Stay 15 01-99 seconds

Defines how much time keypads buzzer will sound before the external
sounders start to operate while an alarm occurs in STAY mode. The timer
is relevant only if the system control Bell>Buzzer is defined ed as Yes.

 Status Timer 000 0-255 seconds

Defines if the status of the system will be displayed while the system is
armed . When the time is defined as 0, the system status will be displayed
during the Arm period. When the time is not 0, the system status will be
displayed only during this interval after the Arm period starts.

 Service Timer 000 0-255 weeks

Use this timer to periodically generate a “Service required” message so

that the user is reminded that a service call is required. The user may
continue to arm and disarm the system. When this time is other than 0,
the panel will count down the time. When the time expires, a service
message will be displayed on all LCD keypads whenever the keypad is on
Disarm display.
To clear the message, the installer needs to reset the time, enter a code
from the Anti Code menu or perform a “remote reset” to the panel.

 Payment Timer 000 0-255 weeks

Use this timer as a reminder for the user payment due. When this time is
other than 0, the panel will count down the time. One week before the
time expires a service message will be displayed as a pre-warning on all
LCD keypads whenever the keypad is on Disarm display. At due time,
the system is prevented from being armed.
To reset the time, enter a code from the Anti Code menu or Installer code,
or perform a “remote reset” to the panel.

Page 75
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Pulse Open 00 sec 0-255 seconds

This timer is relevant only for zones defined with a pulse counter greater
than one (see ZZ, page 109) .
If such a zone is regarded as not ready for the time defined under this
timer, then the zone will be tripped and act according to its type definition.

 Inactivity Timer 0 0-255 minutes

This timer relates to Automatic Arm/Disarm scheduler. If there is no

signal from any of the zones located in a partition that is defined under an
Arm/Disarm scheduler for the time defined as Inactive Timer then the
automatic schedule will be activated and the relevant partitions will be
auto armed (according to the schedule definition).
Note: The Inactive Timer of the scheduling program should be defined as
ON under User Menu> Clock>Scheduler>Weekly>Schedule
#>Arm/Disarm>6) Inactive.

 Controls
The System Control menu contains parameters that control specific system operations.
Access and configure the parameters in the system control menu, as follows:

System: Controls: Basic

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Basic Programming

This section refers to the most common controls in the system.

  Quick Arm Yes Yes/No

YES: Eliminates the need for a user code when arming (Full or partial).
NO: A valid user code is required for arming (Full or partial).

  Quick UO Yes Yes/No

YES: A user can activate a utility output without the need to enter a user
code.
NO: A user code is required to activate a utility output.

Page 76
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Allow Bypass Yes Yes/No

YES: Permits zone bypassing by authorized system users after entering a

valid user code.
NO: Zone bypassing is NOT permitted.

  Quick Bypass No Yes/No

YES: Eliminates the need for a valid user code when bypassing zones.
NO: Qualified users must enter a valid user code to bypass zones.

  False Code Trouble Yes Yes/No

YES: A false code report is sent to the monitoring station after three
successive attempts at arming or disarming in which an incorrect user
code is entered. No alarm sounds at the premises, but a trouble
indication appears on the wired keypads.
NO: A false code report is sent to the monitoring station and a local
alarm is sounded at the premises.
NOTE: Above Grade 2 (for example, for Grade 3), after 10 invalid code
entry attempts the keypad will lock for 90 seconds (relevant for all user
codes and operations – arming, disarming, etc.). This feature is
automatically activated, and there are no parameters to set for it.

  Bell Squawk Yes Yes/No

YES: Arming or disarming the system using a remote control, wireless

keypad or a keyswitch produces a brief “chirp” and activates the strobe
as follows:
1. One chirp indicates the system is armed
2. Two chirps indicate the system is disarmed.
3. Four chirps indicate the system is disarmed after an alarm.
NO: No “chirp” is produced.

  3 Minute Bypass No Yes/No

YES: Bypasses all zones automatically for three minutes when power is
restored to an “unpowered” system to allow for the stabilization of
motion and/or smoke detectors. .
NO: No bypassing occurs.

Page 77
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Audible Panic No Yes/No

YES: The sirens operate when a “Police Alarm” is initiated at the keypad
(if defined), the remote control or when a panic zone is activated.
NO: No siren operation occurs during a “Panic Alarm,” making the
alarm truly “silent” (Silent Panic).
Note
The system always transmits a panic report to the monitoring station.

  Buzzer  Bell No Yes/No

YES: If an alarm occurs when the system is armed in the stay arm mode,
a buzzer sounds for the time defined under Buzzer At Stay (see page 75)
before the external sirens operate.
NO: An alarm in the Stay Arm mode causes sirens to operate
simultaneously.

  Audible Jamming No Yes/No

Relates to the Jamming Time parameter, described on page 73

YES: Once the specified time is reached, the Main Panel activates any
internal sounders and sends a Report Code to the MS.
NO: Same as above, except the internal sounders do not operate.

  Exit Beeps at Stay No Yes/No

Determines whether the system will sound beeps during exit time in stay
arming.
YES: Exit beeps will sound.
NO: Exit beeps will not sound.

  Forced Keyswitch Yes Yes/No

Arming
YES: Keyswitch or Proximity Key arming is performed on any partition.
Any violated (not READY) zone(s) in the partition will be bypassed
automatically. The partition is then "force armed," and all intact zones
are capable of producing an alarm.
NO: The partition cannot be armed until all violated (not ready) zones
are secured.

Page 78
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Arm Pre-Warning No Yes/No

Related to auto arm/disarm operation.

YES: For any partition(s) set up for auto arming, an audible exit delay
(warning) countdown will commence 4.25 minutes prior to the
automatic arming. During this period, exit delay beeps will be heard.
You can enter a valid user code at any time during the countdown to
delay the partition’s automatic arming by 45 minutes.
When an “Auto-Arm” partition is disarmed, as described above, it can
no longer be automatically armed during the current day.
The extended 4.25 minutes warning does not apply to automatic partial
arming.
NO: Auto arming for any programmed partition(s) takes place at the
designated time. The programmed exit delay period and any audible
signal occur as expected.

 Advanced Yes Yes/No

This section refers to the advanced controls in the system.

  Double Verification No Yes/No

of Fire Alarms
YES: Implemented on detection of smoke or fire for verification. Power
to the smoke detector(s) in the affected zone is cut off and restored after
the time defined in the Switch Aux Break delay (page 73). If a subsequent
detection occurs in the same zone within one minute at the end of the
Switch Aux time, the system emits a fire alarm.
NO: No fire alarm verification takes place.

Page 79
Installer Programming

System: Controls: Advanced

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Alarm BUS Failure No Yes/No

YES: Produces an alarm if the communication between the main panel

and any expander is lost. A report is transmitted to the MS.
NO: No alarm occurs. The system, however, produces a local trouble
indication.

  Code Grand Master No Yes/No

YES: Only a user with the grand master authority level can change all
user codes, along with the time and date.
NO: Users with the grand master and master authority levels can change
their own user codes, all codes with a lower authority level, and the time
and date.

  Area No Yes/No

Changes the system operation to area instead of partition, which then

changes only the operation of a common zone.
YES: When selected, the following points are relevant:
• A common zone will be armed after any partition is armed.
• A common zone will be disarmed only when all partitions are
disarmed.
NO: When selected, the following points are relevant:
• A common zone will be armed only when all partitions are armed.
• A common zone will be disarmed when any partition is disarmed.

  Global Follower Yes Yes/No

YES: Specifies that all zones (that are programmed to follow an

Exit/Entry delay time) will follow the Exit/Entry delay time of any armed
partition.
NO: Specifies that all zones (that are programmed to follow an entry
delay time) will follow the entry delay time of only the partitions to
which they are assigned.

Page 80
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Summer/Winter No Yes/No

YES: The LightSYS™2 automatically sets its Time of Day clock one hour
ahead in the spring (on the last Sunday in March) and one hour back in
the Autumn (on the last Sunday in October).
NO: No automatic time accommodation is made.

  24-Hour Bypass No Yes/No

YES: It is possible for the user to bypass a 24-hour zone.

NO: It is not possible for the user to bypass a 24-hour zone.

  Technician Tamper No Yes/No

YES: It is necessary to enter the installer code to reset a tamper alarm (

). Therefore, resetting a tamper alarm requires the intervention of the
alarm company. However, the system can still be armed although the
tamper indication is on.
NO: Correcting the problem resets a tamper alarm, requiring no alarm
company assistance.

  Technician Reset No Yes/No

YES: It is necessary to enter the installer code to reset an alarmed

partition after it has been disarmed. This requires the intervention of the
alarm company.
Note
Before the Ready LED/ can light., all zones within the partition must
be secured.
NO: Once an alarmed partition is reset the Ready LED/ lights when all
zones are secured.

  Installer Tamper Yes Yes/No

For enhanced mode (above Grade 2), the system control bit “INSTALLER
TAMPER” shall be defined as YES.
YES: A Tamper event causes a Lockout condition which can only be reset
by the Installer code or by Anti-Code.
NO: A Tamper event does not cause a Lockout condition

Page 81
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Low Battery Arming Yes Yes/No

YES: Allows arming of the system when a low battery condition is

detected (also in the Power Supply expansion module).
NO: Arming the system is disabled when a low battery condition is
detected.

  Bell 30/10 No Yes/No

YES: Any internal sounders cease to sound for 10 seconds after each 30
seconds of operation.
NO: Any internal sounders operate without interruption.

  Fire Temporal Pattern No Yes/No

YES: During a fire alarm, the sirens produce a pattern of three short
bursts followed by a brief pause.
NO: During a fire alarm, the flow of sounds produced by the siren is a
pattern of two seconds ON, then two seconds OFF.

Page 82
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  IMQ Install No Yes/No

YES: Causes the following parameters to function as follows:

• Auto Arm Bypass: If there is an open zone during the auto arm
process, the system will be armed, and a silent alarm will be
activated (unless the open zone is closed).
• A utility output defined as “Auto Arm Alarm” is activated.
• A utility output defined as “Zone Loss Alarm” is activated
• Guard User: If a Guard user disarms a partition, the system will be
armed automatically after the predefined time period (refer to
Guard, page 74). If there is an open zone during the arming process,
the system will be armed, and an alarm will be sounded (unless the
open zone is closed).
NO: Causes the following parameters to function as follows:
• Auto Arm Bypass: If the Auto Arm programming arms the system
and there is an open zone during the auto arm, the system will
bypass the open zones and arm the system.
• A utility output defined as “Auto Arm Alarm” is deactivated.
• A utility output defined as “Zone Loss Alarm” is deactivated.
• Guard User: If a Guard user disarms a partition, the system will be
armed automatically after the predefined time period (refer to
Guard, page 74). If there is an open zone during the arming process,
the partition will be bypassed.

  Disable Incoming Calls No Yes/No

This parameter is used to disable all incoming calls trying to come in

through the voice channel (PSTN or GSM).
YES: Incoming calls from voice channel are disabled.
NO: Incoming calls from voice channel are enabled.
Note
Incoming data call via the GSM data channel is still enabled

Page 83
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Disable Keypad When No Yes/No

Auto Disarm Exists
YES: When a partition is armed manually or in auto arm mode, and an
auto disarm time is defined, this parameter specifies that all the keypads
that are masked to this partition will not function and that it will be
impossible to disarm the relevant partition.
Note
The partition can be disarmed only by using the configuration software
or the auto disarm function.
NO: When a partition is armed manually or in auto arm mode, and an
auto disarm time is defined, the relevant keypads will function normally.

  Buzzer Delay No Yes/No

YES: The keypad buzzer will be silent during the bell delay time.
NO: The keypad buzzer will be audible immediately when a system
alarm occurs.

  Speaker = Buzzer No Yes/No

YES: The internal sounder will follow the operation of any keypad’s
buzzer.
NO: The internal sounder will follow the external sounder operation
(and not the keypad’s buzzer).

  Confirmation Speaker No Yes/No

YES: A confirmed alarm triggers the internal sounder.

Note
A confirmed alarm actually eliminates the buzzer delay time, causing the
internal speaker to trigger immediately.
NO: The internal speaker will trigger normally (at the end of bell delay
time).

  Bell Confirmation No Yes/No

YES: A confirmed alarm triggers the external bell.

Note
A confirmed alarm actually eliminates the bell delay time, causing the
external alarm to start immediately.
NO: The external bell will trigger normally (at the end of bell delay time).

Page 84
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Error Speaker Time Out No Yes/No

This option determines the duration of the alarm that is generated via the
internal sounders (speakers) when the exit door is programmed as “Final
Exit”, and it is not closed once the exit time expires (an “EXIT ERROR”).
YES: The “EXIT ERROR” alarm in the internal speaker matches the alarm
bell timeout setting.
NO: The “EXIT ERROR” alarm in the internal speaker sounds
continuously until user reset.

  Tamper Report No Yes/No

This option determines if a tamper signal will be reported to the MS

while the system is disarmed.
YES: A tamper signal will always be reported.
NO: A tamper signal will not be reported to the MS during the unset
period.
Note:
A tamper restore report to the MS is always reported, regardless of the
“TAMPER REP” definition

  AC Trouble Arm Yes Yes/No

YES: The system can be armed with an AC trouble detected in the main
panel, power supply module or the bus sounder.
NO: The system cannot be armed with an AC trouble.

  Strobe Arm No Yes/No

This option allows the strobe (internal or external activated by a utility

output - Utility output >Follow Partition > Strobe Trigger) to confirm the
final arming of the system.
YES: A ten second strobe indication will occur after the system is armed.
NO: There will be no strobe indication when the system is armed.

  Final Night Yes Yes/No

This option determines the behavior of a final exit zone when the system
is armed at Stay.
YES: There is no need to open and close the door if the door is closed, in
order to arm the system in Stay. The zone behaves like a regular
“EXIT(OP)” zone type.
NO: There will be no change in the operation of a final exit zone in Stay
arming.

Page 85
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Stay Strobe No Yes/No

YES: For Stay or group arming, a squawk indication will be made by the
strobe activated by an output (Utility output >Follow Partition > Strobe
Trigger) at the end of the exit delay time.
NO: For Stay or group setting, no indication will be made by the strobe at
the end of the exit delay time.

  Blank display No Yes/No

YES: Two minutes after the last keypad operation, the display will
appear blank. After pressing any key, an Enter Code message will be
displayed. The user should enter his code or pass his proximity tag. The
display returns to the normal operation mode. Select this option for
keypads that can be viewed from outside the protected area to disguise
the system status.
NO: The keypad display operates normally

System: Controls: Communication

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Communication
This section refers to controls of the systems communication capabilities.

  Monitoring Station Yes Yes/No

Enable
YES: Enables communication with the central station to report alarms,
trouble, and supervisory events.
NO: No communication with the central station is possible. Choose NO
for installations that are not monitored by a central station.

  Follow Me Enable Yes Yes/No

YES: Enables Follow-Me communication.

If both the MS report and the FM report are defined, the system will first
call the MS phones and then the FM destinations.
Note:
If FM is enabled and no voice module is installed then "beeps" will be
sent instead of messages.
NO: Disables Follow-Me communication.

Page 86
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Configuration Software Yes Yes/No

(U/D) Enable
YES: Enables communication between the alarm company and the
LightSYS™2 main panel using the configuration software. This enables
modifying an installation's configuration, obtaining status information,
and issuing main panel commands, all from a remote location.
NO: Disables communication, as detailed above.

  Cloud Enable No Yes/No

YES: Enables communication between the LightSYS™2 system and the

RISCO Cloud.
NO: Does not enable communication, as detailed above.
System: Controls: EN 50131

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 EN 50131
This section refers to controls that apply to EN 50131 approvals.

  Authorize Installer No Yes/No

This option limits the installer and sub-installer authorization to access

the programming menu.
YES: A grand master code is required to authorize the installer to enter
the programming mode for one hour.
NO: The installer does not need an authorization code.

  Override Trouble Yes Yes/No

Specifies if the system/partition can be armed when there is a trouble in

the system.
YES: The system will arm even if there is a trouble in the system.
NO: When the user starts the arming process and there is a system-
trouble, the user must confirm that he is aware of all troubles before
continuing with the arming process. The user needs to scroll the list of
troubles. At the end of the list the following question will appear:
« Override Trouble? » Using the key he needs to toggle the option
to Y and press .

Page 87
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Restore Alarm No Yes/No

YES: The user must confirm that he is aware that alarm occurred in the
system before rearming the system. The system/partition will be in “Not
Ready” status until it confirms the alarm. The user needs to confirm the
alarm by going to View > Alarm Memory
NO: The user does not need to confirm the alarm before rearming the
system.

  Mandatory Event Log No Yes/No

YES: Only mandatory events (specified in the EN standard) will be

displayed in the event log.
NO: All the events will be displayed in the event log.

  Restore Troubles Yes Yes/No

For enhanced mode (above Grade 2), the system control bit “Rest
Trouble” shall be defined as YES.

YES: A System Trouble condition must be acknowledged by the user

NO: A System Trouble condition will reset automatically when clear

  Exit Alarm Yes Yes/No

YES: A violated zone outside the exit route will generate an alarm during
the exit time. A report to the monitoring station for arming the system is
sent at the beginning of the arming procedure.
NO: A violated zone outside the exit route that remains open at the end
of the exit timer will cause a system fail-to-set condition. A report to the
monitoring station is sent at the end of a successful arming procedure.

  Entry Delayed Alarm No Yes/No

This feature is used to reduce false alarm reports to the MS.

YES: The report to the MS and the siren alarm will be delayed for 30
seconds or until the end of the predefined entry delay (the shorter time
of the two) following a violation of a zone outside the entry route.
NO: A violated zone outside the entry route will generate an alarm
during the entry time and a report will be sent to the MS.

Page 88
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  20 Minutes Signal No Yes/No

YES: Prior to arming the system, the system will check for zones that did
not send a signal for more than 20 minutes. These zones will be regarded
as not ready. A partition assigned with a not ready zone cannot be
armed.
NO: Prior to arming, the system will not check whether a zone did not
send a signal for more than 20 minutes.

  Attenuation No Yes/No

YES: The LightSYS™2 device will be attenuated by six dB during the

communication test.
NO: The LightSYS™2 device works in normal operation mode.

System: Controls: PD6662:2010

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 PD6662:2010
This section refers to controls that apply to BS8243.

  Bypass Exit/Entry Yes Yes/No

YES: It is possible for the user to bypass an Exit/Entry zone.

NO: An Exit/Entry zone cannot be bypassed.

  Entry Disable No Yes/No

YES: The alarm confirmation process will be disabled when the entry
time starts.
NO: The alarm confirmation process will start when the entry time
starts.

  Route Disable No Yes/No

YES: The panel disables the entry route zones (EX/EN, EX (OP)/EN,
followers and Final Exit) from participating in the alarm confirmation
process when the entry time starts.
Note
Sequential confirmation can still be established from two confirmed
zones, located off the entry route.
NO: The entry route zones will participate in the alarm confirmation
process when the entry time starts.

Page 89
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Installer Reset No Yes/No

Confirmation
YES: An installer reset confirmation is required in order to reset the
system after a confirmed alarm. The system cannot be armed until an
installer reset confirmation is performed. The reset can be done by
entering the Anti code or entering the installation mode or by
performing an “Installer reset” from the keypad.
NO: Any means can be used to arm or disarm the system (keypad,
remote phone operation etc.).

  Key Switch Lock No Yes/No

YES: Only a latched key switch zone can arm or disarm the system.
Note
When the system has more than one zone defined as latch key switch,
the arm/disarm operation will occur only after all these zones are armed
or disarmed.
NO: Any means can be used to arm or disarm the system (keypad,
remote phone operation etc.).

  Entry Disarm No Yes/No

Determines if the system’s disarming depends on the entry time.

YES: Only a remote control can disarm the system during the entry time.
Note
The system cannot be disarmed with a remote control while the system is
armed.
NO: The system can be disarmed during any time using any disarming
device.

Page 90
 Installer Programming

System: Controls: CP-01

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 CP-01
This section refers to controls that apply to comply with SIA CP 01.

  Exit Restart No Yes/No

This parameter is used to define if an exit time shall restart one

additional time while an entry/exit zone is tripped twice during exit
time.
YES: Exit time will restart for one time only when an entry/exit zone is
tripped during exit time.
NO: Exit time will not be affected if an entry/exit zone is tripped during
exit time.

  Auto Stay No Yes/No

This parameter is used to define the system’s arming mode when using a
keypad and no exit/entry zone is tripped during exit mode.
YES: If no exit/entry zone is tripped during exit time the system will be
armed in STAY mode.
NO: If no exit/entry zone is tripped during exit time the system will be
armed in Away mode.

System: Controls: Device

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Device Yes Yes/No

This section refers to controls that apply BUS device

  Anti Mask = Tamper No Yes/No

Used to determine the operation of Anti Masking detection in a bus

zone.
YES: Anti mask violation will activate tamper alarm.
NO: Anti mask violation will be regarded as trouble event.

Page 91
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Proximity Anti Mask No Yes/No

=Tamper
Used to determine the operation of the proximity anti masking detection
indicated by the MW channel in the WatchOUT DT detector.
YES: Proximity anti mask detection will activate the tamper alarm.
NO: Proximity anti mask detection will be regarded as a fault event.
Note that Proximity AM operates for approximately 2.2 seconds when
the detector is approached in close proximity.
Ensure that Prox Anti Mask has been enabled when configuring the
WatchOUT DT bus zone parameters.

  Audible Proximity Tamper No Yes/No

This parameter relates to the bus siren.

YES: A proximity anti approach violation will activate the siren.
NO: A proximity anti approach violation will not activate the siren and
will be regarded as trouble by the system.

  Siren Auxiliary = Tamper No Yes/No

This parameter relates to the bus siren.

YES: A siren auxiliary trouble will be regarded as tamper alarm by the
system.
NO: A siren auxiliary trouble will be regarded as trouble by the system.

 RF Wake-Up No Yes/No

Determines whether the system can wake the 2-way keypad up during
exit/entry times or when failing to set the system.
YES: The system wakes the keypad.
NO: The system cannot wake up a 2-way keypad. Use this option to save
battery life.

 Keyfob Instant Arm No Yes/No

YES: Away arming from any 2-way remote control will be instant.
NO: Away arming from any 2-way remote control will be delayed,
following exit delay 1.

Page 92
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Keyfob Instant Stay No Yes/No

YES: Stay arming from any 2-way remote control will be instant.
NO: Stay arming from any 2-way remote control will be delayed,
following exit delay 1.

 Disarm using Code No Yes/No

Defines if a PIN code is required to perform the disarm operation while

using any of the 2-way remote controls.

 Labels
The System Labels menu enables you to modify the labels displayed by the LCD that identify
the system and partition labels. For changing labels from the keypad refer to page 63.

System: Labels

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 System Security System Any 16 Characters

Edit's the global(system label)

 to Partitions 1 through 4 Partition 1 through Any 16 Characters

 Partition 4

 Sounds
The Sounds menu contains parameters that enable you to set the sound(s) that will be
produced after the following system events.

 Tamper Sound

Sets the sound(s) produced by a Tamper violation of a keypad and/or an
expansion module, as follows:
 Silent — Produces no sound
 Bell (External Siren) Only
 Buzzer (Keypad Piezo) Only
 Bell + Buzzer

Page 93
Installer Programming

System: Sounds: Tamper

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  During Disarm Buzzer –

Sets the sound produced by tamper violation while the system is
disarmed

  During Arm Bell only –

Set the sound produced by tamper violation while the system is armed

 Speaker Volume

Sets the volume of internal sounder (speaker) connected to the
Bells+/LS- terminal according to different system modes. The volume
range is between 0 (Silent) and 9 (Max volume). After changing the
volume, sound will be emitted by the internal sounder to enable
evaluation of the selected volume level.

  Trouble 9 0-9

Determines the volume of the internal sounder beeps while there is

trouble in the system

  Chime 9 0-9

Determines the volume of internal sounder chime sound. The Chime

sound is used as an audible indication to a zone violation while the
system is Disarmed.

  Exit/Entry 9 0-9

Determines the volume of the beeps sounded from the internal sounder
during the Exit/Entry times

  Alarm 9 0-9

 Wireless Lost Sound

Sets the behavior of the sound when a wireless loss zone is detected. The
sound can be activated as in a fault condition or as in a tamper condition.
 As trouble
 As tamper
Determines the internal sounder volume during alarm

Page 94
 Installer Programming

 Settings
This option allows setting the system in compliance with specific standardization, languages,
customer of panel default:

System: Settings

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 DIP 2 Enable Enable/Disable

Used to determine whether the LightSYS™2 default switch SW1-2 is

enabled or disabled.
Enabled: When power to the main panel is switched off and then on and
SW1-2 is in ON position , the Installer, Sub-Installer and Grand-Master
codes will return to the original, factory default values. In this case, after
entering the Installer Programming section, the system automatically
enters the Automatic Accessories arming setting process.

Toggle the enable/disable option with .

 Default Panel

Restores programming options to factory defaults.
The panel default option will be followed by questions regarding the

defaults of the labels and erasing wireless devices. Use to select

your option. (See page 70)

 Erase Wireless

Erase wireless devices without changing the system current

programmed parameters. Select the WL device to be erased. (Note: This
entry appears only if a wireless device is registered in the system.)

  Standard

Sets the panel programming options in compliance with the selected

standard:
 EN 50131, also see page 87
 PD6662:2010, also see page 89
 CP01, also see page 91

Page 95
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Customer

Sets the panel programming options in compliance with the selected

customer code. Each customer has its predefined parameters.
Note:
Selecting a customer that is different than the one in use will
automatically default the panel

  Language

Sets the system language (Email, SMS and keypad interface language)
 Text –Change the interface keypad language
 Voice –Change the voice language. (This option is only available if a
voice module is assigned to the system)

 Automatic Clock
This option is used to retrieve an automatic time update (NTP or Daytime) through the IP
network or GPRS.

System: Automatic Clock

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Server Daytime

Select the internet time protocol:

 NTP (Network Time Protocol)
 DAYTIME
 Host 99.150.184.201

The IP address or server name.

 Port 00013

The NTP server port.

 Time Zone (GMT)

Scroll through the available selections:
)GMT-12:00 – )GMT+13:00.

Page 96
 Installer Programming

 Service Information
The Service Information menu enables you to insert information accessible to the system's
users of the alarm company from whom the service is obtained.

System: Service Information

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Name Any 16 characters

Enables you to insert and/or edit the name of the MS from whom service
may be obtained.

  Phone Any 16 characters

Enables you to insert and/or edit the service phone number.

 Firmware Update
Note:
The firmware update menu option series is visible only if the IP or GSM module is installed.
Access and configure the parameters in the System Control menu, as follows:

System: Firmware Update

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Server IP firmware.riscogroup.com

Enter the IP address of the router/gateway where the upgrade file is

located.

 Server Port 80

Enter the port on the router/gateway where the upgrade file is located

 File Name CMD.TXT

Enter the upgrade file name. for example: /LightSYS/0UK/cpcp.bin

Please contact Customer Support services for the file name parameters

 Download File

Select the communication path for the upgrade.
 Via IP
 Via GPRS

Page 97
Installer Programming

2 Zones
[For LightSYS™2 panels with firmware version 3.0 or above installed]: The LightSYS™2
supports up to 50 zones total, in combinations of wired zones, wireless zones and bus zones.
Attributes for each zone vary according to the zone’s type (wired, wireless or type of bus
zone).
The Zones menu provides access to submenus and their related parameters that are used for
programming the characteristics of each of the system's protected zones.
After you access the Zones menu from the main Installer Programming menu, as described
in this section, you can access the following submenus:
Zone Parameters, page 98
Testing, page 124
Cross Zones, page 125
Alarm Confirm, page 128
 Parameters
The Parameters submenu allows you to program the zones parameters. You can program the
basic parameters for a single zone (One by One) or a certain parameter for all zones at the
same time (By Category) .
Note:
In addition to the basic parameters described under this section, each zone has addition
advanced parameters, quick key 2>1>2>7

 Zones: Parameters: One By One

Important:
When using the One by One method, the listing of each zone's parameters is sequential.
Once Zone 1's parameters have been programmed, they are followed by Zone 2's, then
Zone 3's, and so forth.
To program one or more of the system's zones using the One by One method, changes
made to any (or all) of the Zone parameters will NOT be recorded without going through
the entire Zone One by One list.
The following procedure describes how to program the full complement of parameters for
each zone on a one-by-one basis.
The One by One menu contains parameters that enable you to program each of the following:
 Zone Label, below
 Zone Partitions, below
 Zone Group, below
 Zone Type, page 100
 Zone Sound (Arm, Stay, Disarm), page 107
 Zone Termination, page 108

Page 98
 Installer Programming

 Zone Loop Response, page 109

 To program the full complement of parameters for each zone on a one-by-one basis.
1. Access the 2) Zones menu.
2. From with the Zones menu, press 1)Parameters
3. From with the Parameters sub-menu, Press the 1) One by One menu option. The
following display appears:
ZONE ONE BY ONE
ZONE#=01 (XY:ZZ)
Note
The display next to the selected zone number defines the type of zone and its location in
the system in the format XY:ZZ
X: Zone physical type (E=Wired zone, W=Wireless zone, B=Bus zone, I=Input zone or
single BUS zone expander)
Y: The expander ID number. “0” represent the main bus, for example:
E0:04 refer to wired zone 04 on the main board.
B0:15 refers to bus zone 15 on the main bus.
ZZ : The serial zone number in the system (01-32)
4. Specify a two-digit zone number from which you want to start programming (for
example, 01) and press to access the category of Zone Label.
5. Enter the zone label. The Labels category enables you to create and/or edit up to 15
characters to describe each of the system's zones (see page 93)
6. Press to confirm and proceed to the partitions category. The Partitions menu
contains parameters that enable you to program the partition assignment for each zone.
The following display appears:
P=1234 Z=XX
Y...
Note
The XX in the Z=XX designation is for the zone number.
In a multi-partition system, a zone can be assigned to more than one partition.
A system without partitions is regarded as having a single partition (meaning Partition
1)

Using the , , , or keys, select (Y) or deselect the relevant

partitions to which this zone will belong.
7. Press to confirm and proceed to the groups category. The following display
appears:
GROUP=ABCD Z=01
....
Select the group(s) for which the designated zone is to be in effect by using the key
to toggle Y(es) and advance through the entries with the key.

Page 99
Installer Programming

Note:
Each partition has 4 groups. The zone group definition is common to each of the
partitions assigned to the zone.
8. Press to confirm and proceed to the zone type category, displayed as follows:
Z=01 TYPE:
01)EX/EN1 
(and subsequently sound (page 107), termination (page 108) and loop response (page
109).

 Zones: Parameters: By Category

Use this option to modify settings of a specific parameters to all zones.

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Label
The label identifies the zone in the system. Up to 16 characters, as per
the procedure described on page 63.

  Partition
Select the partition (1-4) assignment for each zone.
Group

Select the groups for each zone using the using the key.

  Type
The Zone Type menu contains parameters that enable you to program
the zone type for any zone. Setting the zone type is partly determined by
the arming levels. Three arming levels exist, as follows:
Disarm: The system reacts only to those zones defined as 24 HR, Fire,
Panic, and Trouble.
Arm: The system reacts to all zones.
Stay: The system does not react to zones defined as internal (home). This
setting allows freedom of movement in those zones
Note:
Zones for home arming (STAY) must be defined as Interior type
Available options:
06: Interior+Exit/Entry 1, 09: Interior +Entry follower
07: Interior+Exit/Entry 2, 10: Interior+Instant
08: Interior+Exit(OP)/Entry, ,

Page 100
 Installer Programming

Zone Type
Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ Not Used

Disables a zone. All unused zones should be given this designation

ZZ Exit/Entry 1

Used for Exit/Entry doors. Violated Exit/Entry zones do not cause an

intrusion alarm during the Exit/Entry Delay. If the zone is not secured
by the end the delay expires it will trigger an intrusion alarm.
To start an arming process, this zone should be secured. When system is
armed, this zone starts the entry delay time.

ZZ Exit/Entry 2 Arm/Stay

Same as above, except that the Exit/Entry 2 time period applies.

ZZ Exit (OP)/Entry 1

Used for an exit/entry door, open during the armed period.
This zone behaves as described in the Exit/Entry 1 parameter, shown
above, except that, if faulted when the system is being armed, it does
NOT prevent arming.
To avoid an intrusion alarm, it must be secured before the expiration of
the Exit Delay period.

ZZ Exit (OP)/Entry 2

Same as above , except that the Exit (Op)/Entry 2 time period applies.

ZZ Entry Follower

Usually assigned to motion detectors and to interior doors protecting the
area between the entry door and the keypad.
This zone(s) causes an immediate intrusion alarm when violated unless
an Exit/Entry zone was violated first. In this case, Entry Follower zone(s)
will remain bypassed until the end of the Entry Delay period.

ZZ Instant
Usually intended for non-exit/entry doors, window protection, shock
detection, and motion detectors.
Causes an immediate intrusion alarm if violated after the system is
armed or during the Exit Delay time period.
When Auto Arm and Pre-Warning are defined, the instant zone will be
armed at the end of the Pre-Warning time period.

Page 101
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ I+ Exit/Entry 1 (Interior+ Exit/Entry 1)

Used for Exit/Entry doors, as follows:
• If the system is armed in the AWAY (ARM) mode, the zone(s)
provide a delay (specified by Exit/Entry 1) allowing entry into and
exit from an armed premises.
• If the system is armed in the STAY mode, the zone is bypassed.
Important:
For greater security when arming in the STAY mode, it is possible to
eliminate the Entry Delay period associated with any zone(s), classified
as Exit/Entry Delay 1 by pressing the key twice, one after another.
In effect, this makes it an INSTANT zone during the STAY mode of
operation

ZZ I + Exit/Entry 2
(Interior + Exit/Entry 2)
Same as the I+Exit/Entry 1 parameter, described above, but the
Exit/Entry 2 time period is applicable.

ZZ I + Exit(OP)/Entry 1
Interior + Exit(OP)/Entry 1)
Used for an exit/entry door that, for convenience, may be kept open
when the system is being armed, as follows:
• In AWAY (FULL ARM) mode behaves as an Exit (Op)/Entry 1 zone
(see ZZ above).
• In STAY (ARMED) mode, the zone will be bypassed.

ZZ  I + Exit(OP)/Entry 2
Interior + Exit(OP)/Entry 2)
Used for an exit/entry door that, for convenience, may be kept open
when the system is being armed, as follows:
• In AWAY (FULL ARM) mode behaves as an Exit (Op)/Entry 2 zone
(see ZZ above).
• In STAY (ARMED) mode, the zone will be bypassed.

ZZ  I+ Entry Follow

(Interior + Entry Follower)
Generally used for motion detectors and/or interior doors (for example,

Page 102
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

foyer), which would have to be violated after entry in order to disarm
the system, as follows:
• In AWAY (FULL ARM) mode behaves as an Entry Follower zone.
(see ZZ above)
• In Stay (ARM) mode, the zone will be bypassed.

ZZ  I + Instant (Interior + Instant)

Usually intended for non-exit/entry doors, window protection, shock
detection and motion detectors.
• In AWAY (FULL ARM) mode behaves as an intruder (instant) zone.
• In STAY (ARM) mode, the zone is bypassed.

ZZ  UO Trigger
For a device or zone, which if violated at any time triggers a previously
programmed utility output, and is capable of activating an external
indicator, relay, appliance, and so on.

ZZ  Day Arm

Usually assigned to an infrequently used door, such as an emergency

door or a movable skylight. Used to alert the system user if a violation
occurs during the unset period (fault by day; Intruder at night), as
follows:
• With the system armed (either AWAY or STAY), the zone acts as an
intruder zone. A violation of this zone after the system is aremd or
during the exit delay time period causes an immediate intrusion
alarm.
• With the system disarmed , a violation of this zone attempts to alert
the user by causing the POWER/ LEDs on all keypads to flash
rapidly. This directs the user to view the system's trouble
indications.
• Optionally, such a violation can be reported to the Central Station as
a zone trouble. (Refer to Report Codes: Miscellaneous, page.230)

ZZ  24 Hours
Usually assigned to protect non-movable glass, fixed skylights, and
cabinets (possibly) for shock detection systems.
A violation of such a zone causes an instant intrusion alarm, regardless
of the system's state

Page 103
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ  Fire
For smoke or other types of fire detectors. This option can also be used
for manually triggered panic buttons or pull stations (if permitted), as
follows:
• If violated, it causes an immediate fire alarm, and the Fire/ LED is
lit (steady).
• A fault in the wiring (wire open) to any fire zone causes a Fire
Trouble signal (a rapid flashing of the keypads' FIRE / LED). A
short in the wires will cause an immediate alarm.

ZZ  Panic
Used for external panic buttons and wireless panic transmitters.
If violated, an immediate panic alarm is sounded (if the zone sound is
not defined as silent or audible panic system control is enabled),
regardless of the system’s state and panic report is sent to the
monitoring station. An alarm display will not appear on the keypads.
If violated, an immediate panic alarm is sounded, regardless of the
system's state.

ZZ  Special
For external auxiliary emergency alert buttons and wireless auxiliary
emergency transmitters.
If violated, an immediate auxiliary emergency alarm is sounded,
regardless of the system’s state and a report is sent to the monitoring
station.

ZZ  Pulsed Key Switch

Used to arm/Disarm the system.
Connects an external momentary action keyswitch to any zone terminals
given this designation.

ZZ  Final Exit

Zones of this type must be the last detector to be activated on exit or the
first detector to be activated on entry. When arming the system, the
related partition arms 10 seconds after this zone is closed, or opened and
then closed. After it is triggered once, the zone acts as an exit
(open)/entry 1 zone.

Page 104
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ  Latch Keyswitch

Connect an external SPST latched (non-momentary) keyswitch to any
zone terminals given this designation and operate the keyswitch, as
follows:
• After arming one or more partitions using the keyswitch and then
disarming using the keypad, the related partitions will be disarmed.
In order to arm the partition using the keyswitch again, turn the key
to the disarm position and then to the arm position.

• If a keyswitch latch is assigned to more than one partition and one of

the partitions is armed by using the keypad (the keyswitch stays in
the disarm position), then:
• When changing the position of the keyswitch to the arm
position, all the disarmed partitions, which belong to this
keyswitch, will be armed.
• When turning the keyswitch to the disarm position, all the
partitions will be disarmed.

ZZ  Entry Follower + Stay All

Assigned to motion detectors and to interior doors protecting the area

between the entry door and the keypad, as follows:
• In STAY (ARM) mode, a zone(s) given this designation behaves like
an Exit/Entry zone and is subject to the Entry and Exit Delay time
periods specified under Exit/Entry Delay 1. (Refer to Exit/Entry
Delay 1, page 98.)
• In AWAY (ARM) mode, a zone(s) given this designation behaves
like an Entry Follower Zone and causes an immediate intrusion
alarm when violated unless an Exit/Entry zone was violated first.
• If so, an Entry Follower + Stay zone(s) remains bypassed until the
end of the Entry Delay period.

ZZ  Pulsed Keyswitch Delay

Used to apply the Exit/Entry Delay 1 parameter to the momentary
keyswitch operation. (see ZZ above)

ZZ  Latch Keyswitch Delay

Used to apply the Exit/Entry Delay 1 parameter to the latched keyswitch
operation. (see ZZ above.)

Page 105
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ  Tamper
For tamper detection. This zone operates the same as 24 hours zone, but
it has a special reporting code.
Note:
For this zone type the zone sound is determined according to the
Tamper Sound defined under 1) System 4) Sound  1) Tamper

ZZ  Technical
This zone operates the same as 24 hours zone, its report code should be
manually set according to the relevant detector connected to the zone.

ZZ  Water
For flood or other types of water detectors. This zone operates the same
as 24 hours zone, but it has a special flood report code.

ZZ  Gas
For Gas (natural gas) leak detector. This zone operates the same as 24
hours zone, but it has a special gas report code.

ZZ  CO
For CO (Carbon Monoxide) gas detectors. This zone operates the same
as 24 hours zone, but it has a special CO report code.

ZZ  Exit Term

This type of zone is used to avoid a false alarm by acting like an Exit
(OP)/Entry zone.
When triggered (after arming the system and closing the door or
opening the door, arming the system, and closing the door), the system's
Exit Delay time period will be shortened to 3 seconds.
When you re-open the door, the entry time restarts.

ZZ  High Temperature

For detector temperature (hot or cold). This zone operates the same as 24
hours zone, but it has a special report code.

ZZ  Low Temperature

For detector temperature (hot or cold). This zone operates the same as 24
hours zone, but it has a special report code.

Page 106
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ  Key Box

This zone is mainly used in Scandinavia. Triggering this zone will be
recorded in the event log. It can also be reported to the monitoring
station. No alarm is triggered.
When using this zone you should connect the alarm wiring of this zone
(usually the auxiliary contact of a door) to an external key box and the
tamper wiring to the housing switch.

ZZ  KeySwitch Arm

This zone is used by financial institutions such as cash distribution
centers and banks to control the arming of the vault door or treasury
department entrance.
Use this zone for instant arming of the partition in which the zone is
allocated. This zone cannot perform disarming operation.

ZZ  KeySwitch Delayed Arm

Same as the KeySwitch Arm (ZZ) type but the arming will
be delayed following exit delayed time.

  Sound

This menu enables you to program the sound produced when a systems
zone triggers and alarm. Report to the central station are not affected by
the option of this menu.
The following sound can be selected:
 Silent: Produces no sound
 Bell Only: Activates the bell sounders for the duration of the Bell
Timeout period, or until a User Code is entered
 Buzzer Only: Activates each keypad's internal piezo buzzer.
 Bell + Buzzer: Activates the bell sounders and the keypads' buzzers
simultaneously
Door Chime: The Door Chime parameter is used as an audible
sounder to indicate the violation of a zone(s), as follows:
o If the system is DISARMED, the system's keypad buzzers make
three momentary sounds whenever the zone is violated.
o If the system is ARMED, only the bell sounders produce the
alarm.
A different sound can be defined according to the system status as
follows

Page 107
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  At Arm

Set the sound produced when a system's zone triggers an alarm while
the system is armed in Away.

  At Stay

Set the sound produced when a system's zone triggers an alarm while
the system is armed in STAY.

  At Disarm

Set the sound produced when a system's zone triggers an alarm while
the system is Disarmed.

  Termination

The Termination menu enables you to program the connection type

used for each of the system's zones. The actual (physical) termination for
each zone must comply with that selected in the zone termination menu

 N/C

Uses normally-closed contacts and no terminating End-of-Line Resistor

 EOL

Uses normally-closed (NC) and/or normally-open (NO) contacts in a

zone terminated by End-of-Line Resistor.

 DEOL

Uses normally-closed (NC) contacts in a zone using End-of-Line

Resistors to distinguish between alarms and tamper conditions.

 N/O

Uses normally-open contacts and no terminating End-of-Line Resistor

 TEOL

Uses normally-closed (NC) contacts in a zone terminated by end-of-line

resistance to distinguish between alarm, tamper, and fault/anti mask
conditions.

Page 108
 Installer Programming

  Loop Response

The Loop Response menu enables you to set the different times for
which a zone violation must exist before the zone will trigger an alarm
condition
1) Normal: 400 ms (milliseconds).
2) Long: 1 second
3) Fast: 10 ms (milliseconds).
4) Extra Fast: 1 ms (millisecond). This loop response is usually used
for shutters or other devices that require very quick responses

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Advanced

 Forced Arming

ZZ
This option enables or disables the use of forced arming for each of the
system's zones, as follows:
1. If forced arming is enabled for a particular zone, it allows the system
to be armed even though this zone is faulty.
2. When a zone(s) enabled for forced arming is faulted, the red LED
blinks during the disarm period.
3. After arming, all zones enabled for forced arming are bypassed at
the end of the exit delay time period (p. 72).
4. If a faulted zone (one enabled for force arming) is secured during the
armed period, it will no longer be bypassed and will be included
among the system's armed zones

 Pulsed Counter 01 01-15

ZZ
Specifies that the zone will count the number of open and close pulses
received. If the zone exceeds the predefined number of pulses, the zone
will be tripped and act according to its type definition. After a 25-
second timeout the pulse counter is restarted. The pulse length is the
currently defined loop response time period. (Refer to Zones: Loop
Response, page 109.)

Page 109
Installer Programming

 Abort Alarm

ZZ
This parameter defines whether a zone alarm report to the monitoring
station will be immediate or delayed:
ENABLE: A report to the MS will be delayed according to the Abort
Time Delay parameter 5) Communication > 2 MS > 6 MS Times > 2
Abort Alarm, page 164).
DISABLE: A report to the MS will be sent immediately

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Bus Zones Configuration

The Bus Zone Parameters menu contains parameters that enable you to
program the special parameters of a bus zone. The options are
determined according to the bus detector type:
• Lunar Grade 3: A dual technology ceiling detector with a
mounting height of up to 8.6m (28ft) that incorporates Anti-
CloakTM Technology (ACT).
• WatchOUT DT: A dual technology outdoor detector with signal
processing based on two Passive Infrared (PIR) channels and two
Microwave (MW) channels.
• WatchOUT PIR: An outdoor detector with signal processing based
on two Passive Infrared (PIR) correlated channels
• WatchIN DT Grade 3: A dual technology Grade 3 industrial
detector with signal processing based on two Passive Infrared (PIR)
channels and two Microwave (MW) channels.
• iWISE QUAD Grade 2: A motion detector incorporating Quad PIR
technology
• iWISE QUAD Grade 3: A motion detector incorporating Anti-Mask
and Quad PIR technologies.

Page 110
 Installer Programming

• iWISE DT Grade 3: A motion detector incorporating both Anti-

Mask and Anti-CloakTM Technologies (ACT). It adheres to
environmentally friendly guidelines and is available in 15m and
25m models.
• BWare DT Grade 3 A dual technology Grade 3 industrial detector
with signal processing based on two Passive Infrared (PIR) channels
and two k band Microwave (MW) channels
• BWare QUAD Grade 3 A motion detector incorporating Anti-Mask
and Quad PIR technologies.
• Seismic: A detector that monitors the vibration and temperature of
a specific surface and will react to all known types of intruder
attacks.
Use the instructions below to set parameters for the relevant bus zone
detector.
 To configure the Bus Zone detector parameters:
1. From the Miscellaneous menu, press [3] to access the Bus Zone parameters menu
options. The following display appears:
2. Select the zone that the bus zone detector was assigned to and press . The Bus
Zone parameters menu appears.
3. Use the below tables to configure the parameters for each Bus Zone detector type.

Bus Zone: OPR12 (WatchOUT PIR)

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ LEDS 3 LEDS

Defines the LEDS operation mode.

OFF - Disables the LEDS operation.
 RED ONLY - Only the Red LED will operate. This option is highly
recommended to avoid the possibility that a burglar will “Learn” the
detector behavior.
3 LEDS - All 3 LEDs will operate..
ZZ PIR Sensitivity Normal

Defines the PIR sensitivity of the detector.

LOW MEDIUM NORMAL HIGH
ZZ Lens Type Wide Angle

Defines the actual lens of the detector.

WIDE ANGLE BARRIER / LONG RANGE

Page 111
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ Auxiliary Relay Mode Off
Defines the operation of the auxiliary relay of the detector.
 OFF - Auxiliary relay is disabled
24 Hours - The auxiliary relay will always follow an alarm
 NIGHT ONLY - The auxiliary relay output will follow an alarm
condition only during night time. The time defined by the photocell on
the PCB.
ZZ Auxiliary Relay Time 2.2 Seconds 2.2–480 seconds

Defines the time duration that the auxiliary relay is activated.

 2.2 SECONDS  2 MINUTES 4 MINUTES  8 MINUTES

Bus Zone: iWISE DT Grade 2

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ LEDS On

Defines the LEDS operation mode.

OFF - Disables the LEDS operation.
 ON – Enables the LEDS operation.
ZZ MW (Microwave) Range Trimmer
Defines the microwave channel range.
MINIMUM 25% 50% 65%  85%  MAXIMUM  TRIMMER
(MW is defined by the trimmer setting on the PCB)
ZZ ACT No

Defines the Anti-Cloak™ Technology (ACT) operation mode.

NO – Disables the ACT mode
 YES – Enables the ACT mode
ZZ Automatic Microwave Bypass No
Defines whether the MW channel will be bypassed or not while the
detector identifies trouble in the MW channel.
NO - While detecting a problem in the MW channel it is not bypassed.
Alarm condition cannot be established until the MW channel is fixed.
YES - Switches the detector to operate only in PIR mode in case of
MW trouble

Page 112
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ Green Line Yes

A feature that follows environmental guidelines by avoiding surplus

emission This feature defines the activation of the microwave channel
while the system is disarmed.
NO - Green Line feature is disabled. MW is constantly activated.
YES - Green Line feature is activated.
ZZ Self Test Remote

Used to test the detection technologies. In the event of a failed test, a Self
Test Trouble is created.
REMOTE (Manual) - The remote self test is performed by the system
when a user manually selects the Diagnostics option from the
Maintenance menu via the LightSYS™2 User Functions menu
LOCAL (automatic) - Once an hour, the detector automatically checks
that the detector’s channels are functioning properly.

Bus Zone: (Industrial) Lunar /BWare/iWISE DT Grade 3

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ LEDS On

Defines the LEDS operation mode.

OFF - Disables the LEDS operation.
 ON – Enables the LEDS operation.
ZZ MW (Microwave) Range Trimmer
Defines the microwave channel range.
MINIMUM 25% 50% 65%  85%  MAXIMUM  TRIMMER
(MW is defined by the trimmer setting on the PCB)
ZZ ACT No

Defines the Anti-Cloak™ Technology (ACT) operation mode..

NO – Disables the ACT mode
 YES – Enables the ACT mode

Page 113
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ Automatic Microwave Bypass No
Defines whether the MW channel will be bypassed or not while the
detector identifies trouble in the MW channel.
NO - While detecting a problem in the MW channel it is not bypassed.
Alarm condition cannot be established until the MW channel is fixed.
YES - Switches the detector to operate only in PIR mode in case of
MW trouble
ZZ Green Line Yes

A feature that follows environmental guidelines by avoiding surplus

emission This feature defines the activation of the microwave channel
while the system is disarmed.
NO - Green Line feature is disabled. MW is constantly activated.
YES - Green Line feature is activated.
ZZ Anti-Mask Enable

Defines the operation of Anti Masking detection.

DISABLE ENABLE and behaves according to the settings defined in
quick keys ZZ
ZZ Arm/Disarm No
Defines the operation of the anti masking detection while the detector is
armed or disarmed..
NO – While armed or disarmed, anti-mask behaves according to the
setting defined in quick keys ZZabove.
YES – While armed, anti-mask is disabled. When detector is disarmed
Anti-mask behaves according to the settings defined in quick keys
ZZ.
ZZ Self Test Remote

Used to test the detection technologies. In the event of a failed test, a Self
Test Trouble is created
REMOTE (Manual) - The remote self test is performed by the system
when a user manually selects the Diagnostics option from the
Maintenance menu via the LightSYS™2 User Functions menu
LOCAL (automatic) - Once an hour, the detector automatically checks
that the detector’s channels are functioning properly.

Page 114
 Installer Programming

Bus Zone: iWISE QUAD Grade 2

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ LEDS On

Defines the LEDS operation mode.

OFF - Disables the LEDS operation.
ON - Enables the LEDS operation
ZZ PIR Sensitivity High

Defines the PIR sensitivity of the detector.

LOW HIGH
ZZ Self Test Remote

Used to test the detection technologies. In the event of a failed test, a Self
Test Trouble is created
REMOTE (Manual) - The remote self test is performed by the system
when a user manually selects the Diagnostics option from the
Maintenance menu via the LightSYS™2 User Functions menu
LOCAL (automatic) - Once an hour, the detector automatically checks
that the detector’s channels are functioning properly

Bus Zone: iWISE/BWare QUAD Grade 3

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ LEDS On

Defines the LEDS operation mode.

OFF - Disables the LEDS operation.
ON – Enables the LEDS operation.
ZZ PIR Sensitivity High

Defines the PIR sensitivity of the detector.

LOW HIGH
ZZ Anti-Mask Enable

Defines the operation of Anti Masking detection.

DISABLE ENABLE and behaves according to the settings defined in
quick keys ZZ

Page 115
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ Arm/Disarm No

Defines the operation of the anti masking detection while the detector is
armed or disarmed.
NO – While armed or disarmed, anti-mask behaves according to the
setting defined in quick keys ZZabove.
YES – While armed, anti-mask is disabled. When detector is disarmed
Anti-mask behaves according to the settings defined in quick keys
ZZ.
ZZ Self Test Remote

Used to test the detection technologies. In the event of a failed test, a Self
Test Trouble is created
REMOTE (Manual) - The remote self test is performed by the system
when a user manually selects the Diagnostics option from the
Maintenance menu via the LightSYS™2 User Functions menu
LOCAL (automatic) - Once an hour, the detector automatically checks
that the detector’s channels are functioning properly.

Bus Zone: ODT15 (WatchOUT DT)

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ LEDS 3 LEDS

Defines the LEDS operation mode.

OFF - Disables the LEDS operation.
 RED ONLY - Only the Red LED will operate. This option is highly
recommended to avoid the possibility that a burglar will “Learn” the
detector behavior.
3 LEDS - All 3 LEDs will operate.
ZZ PIR Sensitivity Normal

Defines the PIR sensitivity of the detector.

LOW MEDIUM NORMAL HIGH
ZZ MW (Microwave) Range Trimmer
Defines the microwave channel range.
MINIMUM 20% 40% 60%  80%  MAXIMUM  TRIMMER
(MW is defined by the trimmer setting on the PCB)

Page 116
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ Anti Mask Sensitivity
Defines the sensitivity of the active IR AM: LOW HIGH
ZZ Lens Type Wide Angle

Defines the actual lens of the detector.

WIDE ANGLE BARRIER / LONG RANGE
ZZ Anti-Mask Enable

Defines the operation of Anti Masking detection.

DISABLE Enable
ZZ Arm/Disarm No

Defines the operation of the LEDs and Anti masking detections while the
detector is armed.
 Active IR AM and Proximity AM (Anti masking) is enabled.
LEDs behave according to the LEDs parameter definition.
YES – Active IR AM and Proximity AM (Anti masking) is disabled
LEDs are disabled.
ZZ Prox Anti-mask Enable

Defines the operation of proximity anti masking detection.

 DISABLE Enable

Bus Zone: WatchIN DT Grade 3

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ LEDS 3 LEDS

Defines the LEDS operation mode.

OFF - Disables the LEDS operation.
 RED ONLY - Only the Red LED will operate. This option is highly
recommended to avoid the possibility that a burglar will “Learn” the
detector behavior.
3 LEDS - All 3 LEDs will operate..
ZZ Detection Sensitivity Normal
Defines the sensitivity of the detector (MW + PIR).
LOW MEDIUM NORMAL  ACT (Anti-Cloak™ Technology)

Page 117
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ MW (Microwave) Range Trimmer
Defines the microwave channel range.
MINIMUM 25% 50% 65%  85%  MAXIMUM  TRIMMER
(MW is defined by the trimmer setting on the PCB)
ZZ Alarm Logic PIR and Microwave

Determine the detector’s logic of defining an alarm.

 PIR & MW (and Microwave) – An alarm is activated when both PIR
and MW channels detect an alarm (AND Logic).
 PIR / MW (or Microwave) - An alarm is activated when either PIR or
MW channels detect an alarm (OR Logic).
ZZ Lens Type Wide Angle

Defines the actual lens of the detector.

WIDE ANGLE BARRIER / LONG RANGE
ZZ Anti-Mask Enable

Defines the operation of Anti Masking detection.

DISABLE ENABLE
ZZ Arm/Disarm No

Defines the operation of the LEDs and Anti masking detections while
the detector is armed.
 Active IR AM and Proximity AM (Anti masking) is enabled.
LEDs behave according to the LEDs parameter definition.
YES – Active IR AM and Proximity AM (Anti masking) is disabled
LEDs are disabled.
ZZ Green Line Yes

This feature defines the activation of the microwave channel while the
system is disarmed.
NO - Green Line feature is disabled. MW is constantly activated.
YES - Green Line feature is enabled. This option conforms to
environmentally friendly standards by avoiding surplus emission.
ZZ Sway No

This option allows the recognition and immunity of swaying objects in

a known pattern.
NO - Sway is disabled.
YES - Sway is enabled.

Page 118
 Installer Programming

Seismic

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ LEDs On

Defines the LEDs operation mode.

OFF – Disables the operation of the LEDs.
ON – Enables the operation of the LEDs
ZZ Seismic Sensitivity Level 1

Defines the Seismic sensitivity of the detector.

LEVEL 1, LEVEL 2, LEVEL 3, LEVEL 4, LEVEL 5, LEVEL 6,
LEVEL 7, LEVEL 8
ZZ Interference Time 10 Seconds Either 10, 20, 40, or 80 sec

Defines the moving window of time in which the vibration signal is

accumulated (integrated). Detection is triggered when the accumulated
signal reaches a threshold value. Longer time causes higher detection
sensitivity.
ZZ Explosion Sensitivity Low

Defines the explosion sensitivity of the detector.

LOW HIGH
ZZ Temperature Sensitivity Off

Defines the sensitivity to temperature change.

OFF ON
ZZ Low-Temp Alarm -40% C -99°C to 99°C

Activates alarm upon low temperature level.

ZZ High-Temp Alarm 85° C -99°C to 99°C

Activates alarm upon high temperature level.

ZZ Set/Unset
(this parameter is not used)
ZZ Self Test
(this parameter is not used)

Page 119
Installer Programming

  Wireless Zones Configuration

The Wireless Zone Parameters menu contains parameters that enable

you to program the special parameters of a wireless zone. The options
are determined according to the wireless detector type:
• 1-Way Non-Restorable:
• 2-Way WatchOUT: A dual technology outdoor detector with signal
processing based on two Passive Infrared (PIR) channels and two
Microwave (MW) channels.
• 2-Way Magnet: (including shutter and universal)
• 2-Way IR Beams
• 2-Way Smoke
• 2-Way PIR, Shock, Flood, Gas, Curtain, High Temperature, Zone
Button
Use the instructions below to set parameters for the relevant wireless
zone detector.

1-Way and 2-Way Smoke

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ Serial No.
The identifying 11-digit number on the detector sticker
ZZ Control

ZZ Supervision No Yes/No

Determines if this zone will be supervised by the system expander
according to the time defined under the timer RX Supervision (see page
73)...
ZZ LED Enable Yes Yes/No
Defines whether or not the LEDS operation mode is enabled
ZZ Operation Mode Smoke & Heat S/H/S&H
(2-Way Smoke
Only)
Defines the detector operation mode.
SMOKE HEAT  SMOKE & HEAT

Page 120
 Installer Programming

2-Way PIR, WatchOUT and Wireless IR Beam

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ Serial No.
The identifying 11-digit number on the detector sticker
ZZ Control

ZZ Supervision No Yes/No

Determines if this zone will be supervised by the system expander
according to the time defined under the timer RX Supervision
(see page 73).
ZZ LED Enable Yes Yes/No
Defines whether or not the LEDS operation mode is enabled
ZZ Anti Mask (WatchOUT Only) No Yes/No
Defines the operation of Anti Masking detection and behaves according
to the settings defined in quick keys ZZ
ZZ Detection Mode 2.5 Min 2.5 min/ 2.5 sec
 Normal 2.5 Min  Fast 2.5 Sec
If automatic detection mode is enabled, designate here the polling
periodicity of alarm generating events.
ZZ Sensitivity
• Defines the visual sensitivity of the detector.
LOW  HIGH
LOW MEDIUM  HIGH MAXIMUM (WatchOUT only)
• (For IR Beam) Defines the sensitivity of the detector (how long must
the beam transmission be interrupted to generate an alarm event)
LOW 900 mSEC MEDIUM 675 mSEC  HIGH 450 mSEC
MAXIMUM 225 mSEC

Page 121
Installer Programming

2-Way Magnet (X73)

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

ZZ Serial No. Normal

The identifying 11-digit number on the detector sticker

ZZ Control

ZZ Supervision No Yes/No

Determines if this zone will be supervised by the system expander
according to the time defined under the timer RX Supervision (see page
73)...
ZZ LED Enable Yes Yes/No
Defines whether or not the LEDS operation mode is enabled
ZZ (M&F Univ only) Magnet Enable Yes Yes/No
Yes (Enable) or  No (disable) the transmitter’s magnet.
ZZ Alarm Hold On On On/Off
Use this parameter to define the minimum period between alarm
broadcasts.
ON: Only one alarm message is transmitted in any 2.5 minute time-
period
OFF: Alarm detection is immediately transmitted
ZZ Input Termination: N/O N/O, N/C, DEOL

Use this parameter to program the connection type used for each of the
system’s zones.
(F Shutter only) Shutter: Specifies that the Input 2 will count the
number of open and close pulses received. If the zone exceeds the
predefined number of pulses, the zone will be tripped and act according
to its type definition. After a 25-second timeout, the pulse counter is
restarted. The pulse length is the currently defined Loop Response time
period.
N/O: Uses normally-open contacts and no terminating End-of-Line
Resistor.

Page 122
 Installer Programming

N/C: Uses normally-closed contacts and no terminating End-of-Line

Resistor.
DEOL: Uses normally-closed (NC) contacts in a zone using two 10 KΩ
of End-of-Line Resistors to distinguish between alarms and tamper
conditions
ZZ Input Response Time 500 10/500mSEC
 10 mSEC 500mSEC
Set the duration for which a zone violation must exist in order for the
zone to trigger an alarm condition.
ZZ (F Univ. only)Anti-Sabotage Disabl Enable/Disable
 Enable or  disable the transmitter’s anti-sabotage magnet.
ZZ (F SP only)Shutter Pulse 02 01-16
Define here the number of pulses for the input.

 Resistance
In the LightSYS™2 you have the ability to define separately the end-of-line
resistance of the zones on the main unit
Selection is done by the software with the following available options
Specify here the optional circuit resistance configuration.

Page 123
Installer Programming

 Testing
The following menu is used to perform tests on the system. Note that each test refers to the
last time the device was activated. Tests can be performed on the following elements:

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Self Test

This feature provides an automated self-test for a selected group of

localized intrusion sensors (for example, glass break detectors, sound
discriminators and shock sensors) which respond to an artificial source
of noise and/or vibration.
Automated self-testing is especially useful when sensors are placed in
high security areas where failure cannot be tolerated.
Up to 16 zones can be designated for self-testing.
A sound or vibration generator should be used that can be placed close
enough to the sensors to trigger them when the noise source is
activated. A Programmable Output acts as the source of switched power
for the noise/vibration generator (refer to Sensors Test, page 130). This is
set to conform to the testing schedule. The schedule defines the time
and day for the first test, and sets the times for repeated tests over a 24-
hour period.
A message is sent to the Central Station if all the related sensors are
triggered during the test (if a Report Code has been defined).With
successful completion of the self-test, an entry is also placed in the
system’s Event Log.
If one or more of the sensors fails to trip during the test period, a self-
test failure message is generated and sent to the Central Station. A
record of the failure is also entered in the Event Log.

 Soak Test

EN 50131-3 Note:
The Soak Test function is not in compliance with EN50131-3.
The Soak Test feature is designed to allow false alarming for predefined
detectors to be bypassed from the system, while any alarms generated are
displayed to the user for reporting to the MS. This is especially useful if
Police response withdrawal is being threatened and a particular zone is
causing unidentified problems.
Up to 8 zones can be placed on Soak Test. Any zone placed in the Soak

Page 124
 Installer Programming

Test list is bypassed from the system for 14 days and is automatically
reinstated after that time if NO alarms have been generated by it.
If a zone in the Soak Test list has an alarm during the 14-day period, the
keypad indicates to the user that the test has failed. After the user looks at
the View Trouble option (described in the LightSYS™2 User’s Manual),
the trouble message will be erased. This will be indicated in the event log,
but no alarm will be generated. The alarmed zone’s 14-day Soak Test
period is then reset and restarted..

 To set up a Soak-Test. [LightSYS2]

1. From the Install menu, press quick keys . The

following display appears:
ZONES FOR TEST:
01) ZONE 01 N
2. To put a zone on Soak Test, press . The following display
appears:
LOCATION 01:
ZONE: 00-32
3. Press the keys as per the zone number (e.g. 01 for zone 1)
4. Press to confirm and display the initial menu.
5. To add a second zone for Soak Test, press and repeat the
procedure above, -OR Press the key to return to the
previous menu.

 Cross Zones
Default: No cross zoning
The Zone Crossing menu is used for additional protection from false alarms and contains
parameters that enable you to link together two related zones. Both must be violated within a
designated time period (between 1 and 9 minutes) before an alarm occurs.
This type of linking is used with motion detectors in hostile or false-alarm prone environments.
The LightSYS™2 allows 10 unique sets of zone links (pairs of zones), which can be manually
specified, as required. Zones crossed with themselves are valid pairs. They need to register a
violation twice to trigger the alarm. This process is known as Double Knock. You may want to
establish a number of zone links, but leave them deactivated at this time (see below).

Page 125
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Cross Zones None

To set up a Cross Zone

1. From the Install menu, press quick keys . The first zone link
appears:
ZONES CROSSING:
120 01 S 01
2. Press to modify the first set (01) of zone links:
CROSSING SET 01:
1ST = 01 2ND=01

3. Select the zone pairs manually, as required, by making changes to

the number of the first zone in the set, followed by the number of
the second zone. If necessary, use the or keys to position
the cursor.
Note:
Zones crossed with themselves are valid pairs. They need to
register a violation twice to trigger the alarm. This process is known
as Double Knock.
4. Press to display the correlation type screen:
PAIR: 01,02
1)NONE
Determine how the LightSYS™2 will process violations of the
paired zones.
NONE– Not correlated: Temporarily disables any associated zone
pairings

Page 126
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

1) ORDERED–Correlated: Effects an alarm so the first listed zone
is tripped before the second
2) NOT ORDERED–Correlated: Effects an alarm in which either
zone in the pair may be tripped first. In this case, the specified
zone order (1st, 2nd) has no bearing on the alarm activation.
5. Press to display the alarm violation differential screen:
T.SLOT: XX,YY
SIZE=1 MINUTES
6. Enter the time slot, meaning the maximum amount of time allowed
between the triggering events for them to be considered a valid
violation (XX,YY indicate the crossed zones).
Default: 1 min
Range: 1 to 9 minutes
Repeat the entire process, as required, for any additional zone links
(up to 10).

Page 127
Installer Programming

 Alarm confirm
The Alarm Confirmation menu enables to define protection against false alarms and can be
used for alarm verification

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Alarm confirm

 Confirm partition

Defines which partitions are to be defined for alarm sequential

confirmation.
Each confirmed partition has a separate timer, which is equivalent to the
confirmation time defined in “Confirmation Time Window”.
A confirmed intruder alarm will be reported if two separate alarm
conditions are detected in the same confirmed partition, during the
confirmation time.

Cycle through the four partitions and press to toggle Y/N

 Confirm zones

Define which zones are to be defined for alarm sequential confirmation.

When the first zone goes into alarm the system transmits the first zone
alarm. When the second zone goes into alarm, during the confirmation
time, the panel transmits the zone alarm and the police code.
Notes:
 A confirmed zone will be part of the sequential confirmation only if the
partition in which the alarm occurs is defined as confirmed partition as well.
 Any Code can reset a confirmed alarm.
 If the first zone is violated and not restored until the end of the
confirmation time (no second zone alarm), than this zone will be excluded
from the confirmation process until the next arming.

Cycle through the eight zones and to toggle Y/N

3 Outputs
The Utility Output menu provides access to submenus and their related programming
parameters that enable you to choose the event that will trigger a selected Utility Output, as
well as the manner in which the output will be applied.
Adding one or more Utility Output expansion modules to the system makes an extensive list
of switched output possibilities available.

Page 128
 Installer Programming

After you access the Utility Output menu from the main Installer Programming menu, as
described in this section, you can access the following submenus:

 Nothing, page 129

 System, page 129
 Partition, page 131
 Zone, page 137
 Code, page 138
 To access the Utility Output menu:

1. From the main Installer Programming menu, press , or press the /

keys until you find the number 3)UTILITY OUTPUT option and then press .
2. Enter a two-digit number for the Utility Output that you want to program, using a
leading zero for numbers between 1 and 9 (for example, 01, 02, and so on) and then
press .
You can now program the selected Utility Output. Use the information shown
below.
Note
When selecting an output the display “(x:yy) represent the output location in the system. In
the 0:yy designation, the 0 represents denotes that the output is on the main unit and is not
assigned to an output expander. The yy represents the output ID number (up to 14).

 Nothing
The Nothing option enables you to disable the selected Programmable Output.
1. Access the Utility Output menu and select an output.
2. Press to disable the selected utility output.

 Follow System
The System menu contains Utility Output parameters that follow the System Event.

Utility Outputs: System

Quick Keys Parameter

  Bell Follow
Activates when a bell is triggered. If a bell delay was defined, the utility
output will be activated after the delay period.

Page 129
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter

  No Telephone Line
Activates when a telephone line fault is detected. If a PSTN Lost Delay
time period is defined, the utility output will be activated after the delay
time.

  Communication Failure
Activates when communication with the MS cannot be established.
Deactivates after a successful call is established with the MS.

  Trouble Follow
Activates when a system trouble condition is detected.
Deactivates after the trouble has been corrected

  Main Low Battery Follow

Activates when the LightSYS™2 rechargeable standby battery has
insufficient reserve capacity and the voltage decreases to 11 V or
following an accessory low battery indication.

  AC Loss Follow
Activates when the source of the main panel’s AC power is interrupted.
This activation will follow the delay time defined in the system control
times and the AC Off Delay Time parameter (refer to page 74).

  Sensors Test
Relates to the LightSYS™2 Zone Self-Test (Quick Keys )
This option is selected if the designated utility output is part of the
circuit providing switched power for the source of noise (or vibration)
used in the sensors test procedure.

  Battery Test
A pulsed utility output will follow the battery test only once a day at
9:00 AM. The pulse interval is ten seconds. This parameter is usually
used to perform an overload test on the system by using an external
device.

  Bell Burglary
Activates the utility output after any bell burglary alarm in any partition
in the system.

Page 130
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter

  Scheduler
The utility output will follow the predefined time programming that is
defined in the scheduler of the weekly programs for utility output
activation. For additional details, refer to the LightSYS™2 User’s Manual.

  Switched Aux
Activates the utility output when a fire zone is activated (for fire
detection) according to the time defined in double verification of fire
alarms, page 7979.
This utility output will not have the option to choose pulse or latch in
the Utility Output: Code. The pulse time is defined in switched
auxiliary break, page 73.

  GSM Error
Relates to the installed GSM module. Activates the utility output in the
following cases:
• There is no SIM card in the GSM module or SIM is faulty
• GSM RSSI signal level is low
• GSM network fault

  Bell Test
Activates the output when the “Bell Test” option is selected and
deactivates when the “Bell Test” option is finished.

  Installation
Activates the output following the system installation status. It activates
when the system is in installer programming mode and deactivates
when exiting installer’s mode.

  Walk Test
Activates the output when the “Walk Test” option is selected and
deactivates when the “Walk Test” option is finished.

Page 131
Installer Programming

  Burglary
Activates the output (Pulsed only) following any intruder activation in
the system (Regardless the bell time out timer). The maximum number
of times an output can be activated from the same zone is defined
according to the Swinger Limit Timer (Quick key )
  Panic
Activates the output (Pulsed only) following any panic activation in the
system. The maximum number of times an output can be activated from
the same zone is defined according to the Swinger Limit Timer (Quick
key ).
  Fire
Activates the output (Pulsed only) following any fire activation in the
system. The maximum number of times an output can be activated from
the same zone is defined according to the Swinger Limit Timer (Quick
key )..
  Special
Activates the output (Pulsed only) following any special emergeny
activation in the system. The maximum number of times an output can
be activated from the same zone is defined according to the Swinger
Limit Timer (Quick key).

  24 Hour
Activates the output (Pulsed only) following any 24 Hour zone
activation in the system. The maximum number of times an output can
be activated from the same zone is defined according to the Swinger
Limit Timer (Quick key ).
 Follow Partition

The Partition menu contains Utility Output parameters that follow the Partition
Event. The Utility Output can follow any partition(s) combination
 To access the Partition sub-menus:
1. Access the Outputs menu, as described on page 128.
2. From the Utility Output menu press . The following display appears::
UO=01 FOLLOWS:
2) PARTITION 
3. Press to access the Partition menu options. The following display appears:
PAR.EVENT: UO=01

Page 132
 Installer Programming

01)READY FOLLOW 

4. Select the partition event to be followed from those listed below, using the /
keys.

Quick Keys Parameter

 Ready Follow

Activates the output when all the selected partition(s) are in the READY
state.

  Alarm Follow
Activates the output when an alarm occurs in the selected partition(s).

  Arm Follow
Activates the utility output when the selected partition(s) is armed in
either the AWAY or STAY mode. The utility output will be activated
immediately, regardless of the exit delay time period.

  Burglary Follow
Activates the output when an intruder (intrusion) alarm occurs in
the selected partition(s).

  Fire Follow
Activates the utility output when a fire alarm is triggered in the
selected partition(s) from the keypads or a zone defined as Fire.

  Panic Follow
Activates the utility output when a panic alarm is triggered in the
selected partition(s) from the keypads, remote controls or a zone
defined as Panic

  Special Emergency Follow

Activates the utility output when a special alarm is triggered in the
selected partition(s) from the keypads or a zone defined as Special.

  Buzzer Follow
Activates the output when a keypad in the selected partition(s) sounds
its buzzer during auto setting, Exit/Entry delays, and alarm conditions.

  Chime Follow
Activates the output when a keypad in the selected partition(s) sounds
its chime.

Page 133
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter

  Exit/Entry Follow
Activates the output when the selected partition(s) initiates an
Exit/Entry delay period.

  Fire Trouble Follow

Activates the output when a FIRE TROUBLE is detected in the selected
partition(s).

  Day (Zone) Trouble

Activates when a day zone trouble is detected in the selected
partition(s).

  General Trouble Follow

Activates the output when a fault condition is detected in the selected
partition.

  Stay Follow
Activates the utility output when the selected partition(s) is armed in
STAY mode.

  Tamper Follow
A latched output activated when a tamper occurs in the selected
partition(s) and follows any type of tamper. The output deactivates at
tamper reset.

  Disarm Follow
Activates the utility output when the selected partition(s) is disarmed.

  Bell Follow
This output enables the connection of different external sounders to
different partitions. Activates the output when one of the defined
partitions is in alarm mode and the bell is triggered. It will be activated
for the programmed bell time or until the alarm is unset.
Note:
The external sounder will not generate any squawk sounds

Page 134
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter

  Bell Stay Off

This parameter causes the output to function as follows:
• In Away arming mode, the output will follow the bell activation
in the defined partitions.
• In Stay mode, the output will not be activated.
Notes:
If an alarm occurs in a zone that shares more than one partition and
one of the partitions is in Arm mode (while the other is in Stay
mode), the output will be activated, as described above.
• In Stay mode, a 24-hour zone will not activate this output.

  Zone Bypass
Activates the output when the relevant partitions are in Away or Stay
mode and any zone in the relevant partitions is bypassed.

  Automatic Arm Alarm

Activates the utility output when there is a not ready zone at the end
of the pre warning time during an auto-arm process. The output
restore shall be on Bell- Timeout or at user Disarm.

  Zone Loss Alarm

Activates the utility output when there is a lost wireless zone in the
system. The output restore shall be on Bell-Timeout or at user Disarm.

  Bell Trigger
Mainly used for the connection of different external sounders to
different partitions in the UK. Activates the output when one of the
defined partitions is in alarm mode and the bell is triggered. It will be
activated for the programmed bell time out or until alarm is disarmed.
This output generates squawk sounds and has a special sound for fire
alarms.
Note:
In fire alarm the output will not follow the bell delay time (see page
72) but will trigger immediately. It will be triggered in pulsed
sequence: five seconds on and two seconds off.

Page 135
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter

  Strobe Trigger
A latched output that is used to trigger a strobe. The output is
activated when one of the defined partitions is in alarm mode or
during squawks. The output will be activated until the alarm is
disarmed. The output is also activated in test mode.
Note:
A tamper alarm will not activate the output if all the partitions are
disarmed.

  Fail To Arm
Activates when one of the defined partitions fails to arm and
deactivates at user reset.

  Confirm Alarm
The output activates when a confirmed alarm occurs in a partition
and deactivates at the restore of the alarm confirmation. RISCO
recommends that you use this output for the Red-Care STU
Confirmed Alarm channel.

  Duress Follow
Activates the Utility Output when a DURESS alarm is initiated at the
keypad related to the selected partition(s).
1. Press . The following display appears:
P=1234 UO=XX
Y...
Note:
The XX in the UO=XX refers to the number of the Utility Output currently being
programmed.
2. Use the key to toggle between Y Yes and N No to designate the partition(s)
that will activate the selected Utility Output (UO),
-OR-
Press the partition number [1 to 4] to select or deselect it
3. Press and proceed to Pattern of Operation, page 139 , to set the pattern and
duration of operation

Page 136
 Installer Programming

 Follow Zone
The Zone menu contains Utility Output parameters that follow the Zone Event. Each
Utility Output can be activated by a group of up to five zones
 To access the Zone sub-menus:
1. Access the outputs menu, as described on page 128.
2. From the Utility Output menu, press [3]. The following display appears:
UO=01 FOLLOWS:
3) ZONE 
3. Press to access the Zones menu. The following display appears:
ZONE EVENT: UO=01
121 ZONE FOLLOW 
4. Select the zone event type to be followed from the following list:

Utility Output: Zone

Quick Keys Parameter

  Zone Follow

Activates the utility output when the selected zone is tripped.

The tripped zone need not be armed to trigger the utility output.

  Alarm Follow

Activates the utility output when the selected zone causes an alarm.

  Arm Follow

Activates the utility output when the selected zone is armed by the
system.

  Disarm Follow

Activates the utility output when the selected zones are disarmed.
1. Press . The following display appears:
ZONES FOR UO=XX
ZONE:00 1st
2. Enter the zone numbers in the group and press after each one. For each
utility output, you can define a group of up to five zones.
Note:
If you choose a zone number that is not in the system, a broken line is displayed
(--).
3. Press and proceed to Pattern of Operation, page 139, to set the pattern and
duration of operation

Page 137
Installer Programming

 Follow Code
The code menu parameters enable you to program the activation of the selected
utility output when the user chooses the user functions menu (Selects
ACTIVITIES/UTIL OUTPUT, enters an authorized user code and presses . The
installer designates the user code(s) for triggering the selected UO.
Refer to the LightSYS™2 User’s Manual for additional details about triggering
utility output(s) via user codes.
Note:
The utility output is activated by entering a user code only if the Quick UO
parameter under System Control is defined as Disabled. When the Quick UO is
defined as Enabled, no user code is required.

 To access the Code sub-menus:

1. Access the outputs menu, as described on page 128.

2. From the Utility Output menu, press . The following display appears:
UO=01 FOLLOWS:
4) CODE 
3. Press to display the following:
CODES FOR UO=01:
00)GRAND N

4. Use the and keys to select from any of the 16 available users codes.

5. Use the key to toggle between Y YES or N NO for each user chosen to trigger
the designated utility output.
6. Press and proceed to Pattern of Operation, to set the pattern and duration of
operation

Page 138
 Installer Programming

Utility Output: Pattern of Operation

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Pulse N/C 05 seconds 01-90 seconds

The utility output is always activated (N/C) before it is triggered

(pulled down to negative).
When triggered, it deactivates for the pulse duration specified below
and then reactivates automatically.
1. Press  and then press .
2. Choose the desired pulse duration, between 01-90 seconds.
3. Press and set the activation by choosing ALL or ANY using
the key.
4. Press and define a label for the UO (refer to the note below).

 Latch N/C

The utility output is always Activated (N/C) before it is triggered

(pulled down to negative). When triggered, it deactivates and remains
deactivated (latched) until the operation is restored.
1. Press and then press .
2. Using the key select ALL or ANY to set the activation and
press .
3. Using the key select ALL or ANY to set the deactivation
and press .
4. Define the output label and press

 Pulse N/O 05 seconds 01-90 seconds

The utility output is always deactivated (N/O) before it is triggered

(pulled up). When triggered, it activates (is pulled down) for the
pulse duration specified below, then deactivates automatically.
1. Press and then press .
2. Choose the desired pulse duration, between 01-90 seconds
3. Press and set the activation by choosing ALL or ANY using
the key
4. Select a label for the UO (refer to the note below).

Page 139
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Latch N/O 05 seconds 01-90 seconds

The utility output is always deactivated (N/O) before it is triggered

(pulled up).
When triggered, it activates (is pulled down) and remains activated
(latched) until the operation is restored.
1. Press and then press .
2. Using the key select ALL or ANY to set the activation and
press .
3. Using the key select ALL or ANY to set the deactivation
and press .
4. Define the output label and press
Note
You can create and/or edit a ten-character label description for each
utility output. See page 63, for additional details

Utility Output; Activation/Deactivation

When the utility output is following more than one partition or zone, the installer can choose
the logic of the utility output activation or deactivation, as follows:

• If the Pattern of Operation is defined as Latch N/O or Latch N/C, the Installer can choose
the activation and deactivation logic of the UO to follow either after all the
Partitions/Zones or after any of the Partitions/Zones.

• If the Pattern of Operation is defined as Pulse N/O or Pulse N/C, the Installer can choose
only the activation logic of the utility output to follow either after all the
Partitions/Zones or after any of the Partitions/Zones. The deactivation operation follows
the defined time period.

Page 140
 Installer Programming

4 Codes
The Codes menu provides access to submenus and their related parameters that enable you
to maintain the User Codes in the system. In addition, the LightSYS™2 contains the
following special codes:
• Grand Master Code: Used by the system’s owner or chief user.
• Installer Code: Used by the LightSYS™2 installation company technician to program the
main panel.
• Sub-Installer Code: Used by a technician sent by the LightSYS™2 installation company
to carry out restricted tasks defined at the time of system installation by the installation
technician. The Sub-Installer can access with his code only those programming menus
predefined for his access.
This section describes how to perform the following:
• Determine the authority level of each user code
• Assign partition(s) to a specific code
• Change the Grand Master, Installer, and Sub-Installer codes
• Upgrade the security level to a six-digit code
After you access the Code Maintenance menu from the main Installer Programming menu, as
described in this section, you can access the following submenus:
 User, page 141
 Grand Master, page 143
 Installer, page 144
 Sub-Installer, page 144
 Code length, page 144
 To access the Codes menu:

1. From the main Installer Programming menu, press [4], or press the /
keys until you find the number [4] Codes and then press . The first submenu 1)
User appears.
2. You are now in the Codes menu and can access the required submenus, as described
in the following sections

 User
User rights can be defined by allocating each user a specific authority level and specific
partitions. Up to 16 users can be defined in the system
1. Access the 4) Codes menu
2. Press 1 to access the user menu
3. Select user and press
4. Set partition and authority level as follows

Page 141
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Partition
Specify the partition(s) for which the designated user can have access by
using the  to  keys.

  Authority Level

The Authority menu enables you assign the Authority Level of each User
Code. There are eight Authority Levels to match the needs of various
users, as described in Authority Levels, below
Toggle through the set of available user definitions using the key:
• Master: There are no restrictions in the number of master codes
(as long as they do not exceed the number of codes remaining in
the system).
o Restricted to assigning and changing user codes belonging
to those with authority levels of master and below (user,
arm only, and maid)
o Restricted access to designated partitions

• User: There are no restrictions in the number of user codes (as

long as they do not exceed the number of codes remaining in
the system). The user has access to the following:
o Arming and disarming
o Bypassing zones
o Accessing designated partitions
o Viewing system status, trouble, and alarm memory
o Resetting the switched auxiliary output
o Activating designated utility outputs
o Changing his/her own user code

• Arm Only: There are no restrictions in the number of Arm Only

codes (as long as they don’t exceed the number of codes
remaining in the system). Arm Only codes are useful for
workers who arrive when the premises are already open, but
because they are last to leave, they’re given the responsibility to
close the premises and arm the system. The users with Arm
Only codes have access for arming one or more partitions.

Page 142
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

• Cleaner: The cleaner code is a temporary code, which is to be
immediately deleted from the system as soon as it is used to
arm. This code is typically used for maids, home attendants,
and repairmen who must enter the premises before the owner(s)
arrive. These codes are used as follows:
o For one-time arming in one or more partitions.
o If first used to disarm the system, the Maid code may be
used once for subsequent arming.
• User Unbypass: This user has access to all the user’s privileges
apart from bypassing zones.
• Guard: This user can only disarm the system. After entering the
Guard code, the system will be disarmed for the predefined
time period (See: Guard Delay, page 74).
• Duress: When coerced into disarming the system, the user can
comply with the intruder’s wishes while sending a silent duress
alarm to the central station. To do so, a special duress code must
be used, which when used, will disarm the system in the regular
manner, while simultaneously transmitting the duress alarm. In
any other situation the Duress authority level behaves the same
as the user authority level.
• UO Control: Typically used to enable the operation of a device
controlled by a utility output (meaning a door and so on). These
codes are used only to operate a utility output.

 Grand Master
Default: 1234.
The Grand Master Code is used by the system’s owner and is the highest Authority Level.
The owner can set/change the Grand Master Code.
Note:
The grand master code can also be changed in the user menu (by the grand master).
The Grand Master code is designated as Code 00.
The grand master, the installer and the sub-installer can enter and change other level codes,
but they cannot see the code. The message [****] is displayed instead of the code

Page 143
Installer Programming

 Installer
Default: 1111
The Installer Code provides access to the Installer Programming menu, allowing modification
of all system parameters. The Installer Code is used by the LightSYS™2 installation company
technician to program the system.
The Installer can change the Installer Code.

 Sub Installer
Default: 2222
The sub-installer code allows limited access to selected parameters from the installer
programming menu.
We recommend changing the factory default to a code unique to the main panel and/or to
those who may serve as sub-installers in your MS, as described in the following procedure.
The Sub-Installer is prohibited to access the following parameters:
• Default Enable
• Code Length
• Installer Code
• Communication menu.

 Code Length
The Code Length specifies the number of digits (either 4 or 6) for the Grand Master and
Master codes. All the other codes (User, Arm Only and Maid) use from one digit up to a
maximum of six digits.
Note:
When you change the code length parameter, all user codes are deleted and must be re-
programmed or downloaded.
For a 6-digit Code Length system, 4-digit default codes like 1-2-3-4 (Grand Master), 1-1-1-1
(Installer), and 2-2-2-2 (Sub-Installer) become 1-2-3-4-0-0, 1-1-1-1-0-0, and 2-2-2-2-0-0,
respectively.
If you change the Code Length back to 4 digits, the system codes are restored to the default 4-
digit codes.
EN 50131 Note:
 All code length are 4 digits: xxxx
 For each digit 0-9 can be used
 All codes from 0001 to 9999 are acceptable
 Invalid codes cannot be created since after 4 digits are input, the "Enter" is automatic.
 Codes are rejected when trying to create a code that is in the wrong format.

Page 144
 Installer Programming

5 Communication
The Communication menu provides access to submenus and their related parameters that
enable the system to establish communication with the monitoring station, Follow Me or
Configuration Software.
The Communication menu is divided into the following sub-menus:
 Method, page 145
 Monitoring Station (MS), page 156
 Configuration Software, page 167
Follow Me, page 170
 Method
This option allows you to configure the parameters of the communication methods
(channels) of the LightSYS2, with three available communication types:
 PSTN
 GSM
 IP
 Radio (Long Range radio)
PSTN

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 PSTN
The PSTN screens contains parameters for the communication of the
LightSYS™2 over the PSTN network.

 Timers
Timers related to communication through the PSTN channel

  PSTN Lost Delay 4 minutes 0–20 minutes

The time after which the system will regard the PSTN line as lost. This
time also specifies the delay before reporting the event into the event log
or operating a utility output that follows this event.
00 indicates no supervision of the phone line.

Page 145
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Wait for Dial Tone 3 0–255 seconds

The number of seconds the system waits to detect a dial tone.

 Control

  Alarm Phone Line Cut No Yes/No

YES: Activates the external sirens if the land line, connected to the
LightSYS™2 panel is cut or the telephone service is interrupted for the
time defined in the PSTN Lost time parameter.
NO: No activation occurs.

  Answering Yes Yes/No

Machine Override
YES: The Answering Machine Override is enabled, as follows:
1. The configuration software at the alarm company calls the
account.
2. The software hangs up after one ring by the CS operator.
3. Within one minute, the software calls again.
4. The LightSYS™2 is programmed to pick up this second call on the
first ring, thus bypassing any interaction with the answering
machine.
Note:
This feature is used to prevent interference from an answering
machine with remote configuration software operations.
NO: The answering machine override is disabled, and communication
takes place in the standard manner.

 Parameters

  Dial Method DTMF

When selecting the dialing method, your choice must be compatible

with the type of phone service available at the protected premises. Use
the / keys to choose between the options.
 DTMF (Touch Tone ®)
 PULSE, 20BPS
 PULSE, 10BPS

Page 146
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Rings To Answer 12 01-15

The number of rings before the system answers an incoming call

  Area Code

The system area telephone code. This code will be deleted from a
telephone number while the system tries to dial the number through the
PSTN network.

  PBX Prefix

A number dialed to access an outgoing line when the system is
connected to a Private Branch Exchange (PBX) and not directly to a
PSTN line. This number will be added automatically by the system
while trying to call from a PSTN line.

 Call Wait

Enter a string to prevent call waiting from interrupting the system
during a report to the monitoring station, as defined by your local
telephone provider, for example: *70.
This string will only appear during the first attempt to send a report to
a MS number (PSTN or GSM).
Note:
Do Not use the Call Waiting cancel features inappropriately. Using this
feature on a line with no call waiting will prevent successfully reporting
to the monitoring station.

GSM

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 GSM
The GSM screen contains parameters for the communication of the
system over the GSM/GPRS network.

 Timers
Allows to program timers related to operation with the GSM module

Page 147
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Low RSSI GSM 1 minute 001–255 minutes

Duration
The period length during which the reception is below the minimum
threshold (defined by the GSM Network Sensitivity parameter) that
triggers the Panel to send a report of GSM Lost. ( )

 GSM Network Loss 10 minutes 001–255 minutes

The period length after which the Panel will send a report of GSM
network loss to the MS.

 SIM Expire 0 months 00–36 months

A pre-paid SIM card has a defined life length defined by the provider.
After each charging of the SIM, the user will have to manually reset the
expiration time of the SIM card. Thirty days before the expiring date, a
notification will be displayed on the keypad’s LCD.
Set the SIM expiring date (in months) using the numeric keys, according
to the time given by the provider.

 MS Polling 00000 0-65535 times

The time period that the system will establish automatic communication
(polling) with the MS over GPRS, in order to check the connection.
3 polling times can be defined: Primary, Secondary and Backup. For each
time period define the number of units between 1- 65535. Each unit
represents a time frame of 10 seconds.
Note:
When using the polling feature through GPRS the MS channel parameter
must be defined as GPRS only.
The report code for MS polling is 999 (Contact ID) or ZZ (SIA)
When the GPRS Primary polling time is defined as 0, no polling message
is sent to the MS
The use of these time periods depends on the reporting order to the MS
defined by the Report Split MS Urgent parameter (See: 5)Communication
> 2)MS > 7)Report Split)
The following table describes how the three MSs use the primary,
secondary and backup time intervals in the various MS report split
options.

Page 148
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

MS report MS 1 Polling MS 2Polling MS 3 Polling

Urgent State State State
events
Do not call
N/A N/A N/A
Call 1st Primary N/A N/A
Call 2nd N/A Primary N/A
Call 3rd N/A N/A Primary
Call All Primary Primary Primary
1 Backup 2
st nd Primary If (MS 1 is OK) N/A
Secondary
else (MS#1 Fails)
Backup
1st Backup If (MS#1 is OK) If (MS#2 is OK)
Primary
2nd3rd Secondary Secondary
else (MS#1 Fails) else (MS#2
Fails)
Backup
Backup
1st Backup 3rd If (MS#1 is OK)
Primary Primary
Call 2nd Secondary
else (MS#1
Fails)
Backup
If (MS#2 is OK)
2 Backup 3
nd rd Primary Primary
Call 1st Secondary
else (MS#2
Fails)
Backup

MS Polling example:
When selecting MS 1 (GPRS), MS 2 (GPRS) and split report option 1st
Backup 2nd (using the default primary, secondary and backup time
intervals), the report process will be as follows:
In a normal state:
Polling through the GPRS network using the GSM module will occur
every 90 seconds according to the primary time interval to MS 1 and
every 3600 seconds (1 hour) according to the secondary time interval to
MS 2.

Page 149
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

When communication to MS 1 fails, polling occurs every 90 seconds
according to the backup interval to MS 2. When communication returns
to MS 1, polling reverts back to the secondary time interval and occurs
every 3600 seconds (1 hour) to MS#2.

 GPRS
Allows programming parameters that relate for the communication
over the GPRS network.

 APN Code

To establish a connection to the GPRS network an APN (Access Point
Name) code is required. The APN code differs from country to country
and from one provider to another (the APN code is provided by your
cellular provider).
The LightSYS™2 supports an APN code field of up to 30 alphanumeric
characters and symbols (!, &, ? etc).

 APN User Name

Enter user name for the GPRS network (if required). The user name is
provided by your provider.
The LightSYS™2 supports a user name field of up to 20 alphanumeric
characters and symbols (!, &, ? etc).

 APN Password

The password to the GPRS network as provided by your provider (if
required).
The LightSYS™2 supports a user name field of up to 20 alphanumeric
characters and symbols.

 Email

The following programming parameters are used to enable sending

Follow Me event messages by e-mail through GPRS.
Notes:
To enable e-mail messaging, the GPRS parameters have to be defined .

  Mail Host 000.000.000.000

The IP address or the host name of the SMTP mail server.

Page 150
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  SMTP Port 00000 00000–65535

The port address of the SMTP mail server.

  Email Address

The Email address that identifies the system to the mail recipient.

  SMTP User Name

A name identifying the user to the SMTP mail server
The user name field can include up to 10 alphanumeric characters and
symbols (!, &, ? etc)

  SMTP Password

The password authenticating the user to the SMTP mail server
The password can include up to ten alphanumeric characters and
symbols (!, &, ? etc).

 Controls
Allows controlling timers related to operation with the GSM module.

  Caller ID No Yes/No

The Caller ID function enables to restrict SMS remote control operations

to the predefined Follow Me phone numbers. If the incoming number is
recognized as one of the Follow Me numbers, the operation will be
executed.

 Parameters
Allows to program timers related to the operation with the GSM
module.

  PIN Code

The PIN (Personal Identity Number) code is a 4 to 8 digit number giving
you access to the GSM network provider.
Note:
You can cancel the PIN code request function by inserting the SIM card
into a regular mobile phone and according to the phone settings, disable
this function

Page 151
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  SIM Number

The SIM phone number. The system uses this parameter to receive the
time from the GSM network in order to update the system time.

  SMS Center Phone

A telephone number of the message delivery center. This number can be
obtained from the network operator.

  GSM Network Sensitivity (RSSI) Disabled/Low/High

Set the minimum acceptable network signal level (RSSI level).

Options: Disabled (No troubles for low signal reception) / Low signal /
High signal

 Prepay SIM

Allows programming parameters that will be used when a prepaid SIM
card is used in the system.

  Get Credit by

Depending on the local network provider, the user can receive the credit
level of the prepaid SIM card by sending a predefined SMS command to
a defined number or by calling a predefined number through the voice
channel. The activation of the credit request can be done by the Grand
Master.
• SMS Credit Message: Enter the message command as defined by
the provider and the provider’s phone number to which the credit
level SMS message request will be sent.
• Voice Credit: Enter the provider’s phone number to which a call
will be established
• Service Command: Enter the service command message as defined
by the provider

  Phone To Send

The provider’s phone number to which the credit level SMS message
request will be sent to or a call will be established, depending on the
selection in the Get Credit by parameter.

  Phone To Receive

The provider’s telephone number from which an automatic SMS credit
status message will be sent from.

Page 152
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  SMS Message

When performing manual Credit Level check this message will be sent to
the provider in order to receive the SIM card credit. The message is
predefined (for example “BILL”) by your service provider.
* When using a service command this field is ignored.

IP

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 IP

The IP menu contains parameters for the communication of the system

over the IP network.

 IP Config
The IP menu contains parameters for the communication of the system
over the IP network.

 Obtain Automatic IP

Defines whether the IP address, which the LightSYS™2 refers to, is
dynamic or static.

 Dynamic IP
The system refers to an IP address provided by the DHCP.

 Static IP
The system refers to a static IP Address.

 Panel Port

The LightSYS™2 Port address.

 Panel IP (Only for Static IP)

The LightSYS™2 static IP address

 Subnet Mask (Only for Static IP)

The subnet mask is used to determine where the network number in an
IP address ends.

Page 153
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Gateway (Only for Static IP)

The IP address of the local Gateway, which enables communication
settings to other LAN segments. This address is the IP address of the
router connected to the same LAN segment as the LightSYS™2.

 DNS Primary (Only for Static IP)

The IP address of the primary DNS server on the network.

 DNS Secondary (Only for Static IP)

The IP address of the secondary DNS server on the network.

 Email
Allows programming parameters that enable the LightSYS™2 to send
Email messages following Follow Me events

  Mail Host 000.000.000.000

The IP address or the host name of the SMTP mail server.

  SMTP Port 00000 00000–65535

The port address of the SMTP mail server

  Email Address

The Email address that identifies the system to the mail recipient.

  SMTP User Name

A name identifying the user to the SMTP mail server. The user name
field can include up to 10 alphanumeric characters and symbols (!, &, ?
etc).

  SMTP Password

The password authenticating the user to the SMTP mail server. The PW
can include up to 10 alphanumeric characters and symbols (!, &, ? etc).

 Host Name Up to 32 Characters

IP address or a text name used to identify the LightSYS™2 over the

network. Default: Security System

 MS Keep alive (Polling)

The time period that the system will establish automatic communication

Page 154
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

(polling) with the MS over the IP network, in order to check the
connection. Three polling times can be defined: primary, secondary and
backup. For each time period, define the number of units between 1–
65535. Each unit represents a time frame of 10 seconds.
Note:
When using the polling feature through IP, the MS channel parameter
must be defined as IP only.
The use of these time periods depends on the reporting order to the MS
defined by the report split MS urgent parameter (See page 166). The
following table describes how the three MSs use the primary, secondary
and backup time intervals in the various MS report split options.)
MS report MS 1 Polling MS 2Polling MS 3 Polling
Urgent State State State
events
Do not call
N/A N/A N/A
Call 1st Primary N/A N/A
Call 2nd N/A Primary N/A
Call 3rd N/A N/A Primary
Call All Primary Primary Primary
1st Backup 2nd Primary If (MS 1 is OK) N/A
Secondary
else (MS#1
Fails) Backup
1st Backup If (MS#1 is OK) If (MS#2 is OK)
Primary
2nd3rd Secondary Secondary
else (MS#1 else (MS#2
Fails) Fails)
Backup Backup
If (MS#1 is OK)
1st Backup 3rd Primary Primary
Call 2nd Secondary
else (MS#1 Fails)
Backup
If (MS#2 is OK)
2nd Backup 3rd Primary Primary
Call 1st Secondary
else (MS#2 Fails)
Backup

Page 155
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

MS Polling example:
When selecting MS 1 (IP Only), MS 2 (IP only) and split report option 1st
Backup 2nd (using the default primary, secondary and backup time
intervals), the report process will be as follows:
In a normal state:
Polling through the IP network using the IP module will occur every 30
seconds according to the primary time interval to MS 1 and every 3600
seconds (1 hour) according to the secondary time interval to MS 2.
When communication to MS 1 fails, polling occurs every 30 seconds
according to the backup interval to MS 2. When communication returns
to MS 1, polling reverts back to the secondary time interval and occurs
every 3600 seconds (1 hour) to MS#2

Radio (LRT)

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 LRT (Long Range Transmission)

The LRT menu contains parameters for setting a system long-range
radio communication network, using the Location Aided Routing
(LARS) protocol (LARS, LARS1, or LARS2) or E-LINE protocol to
facilitate detailed event transmission to monitoring stations.

 Account 0 0–00FFFF

Page 156
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

The number that recognizes the customer at the monitoring station. You
can define an account number for each monitoring station. These
account numbers are the 6-digit numbers assigned by the monitoring
station.
Notes:
Account Number Communication Format:
• The account number will always be reported as 4 digits, for
example: A number defined as 000012 will be reported as 0012
• The account range depends on which protocol is in effect, as
follows:
Protocol Range
LARS 0000–7779 (First 3 digits: 0–7 only)
LARS1 0000–1FFF
LARS2 0000–FFFF
If more than 4 digits were defined, the system always sends the
last 4 digits of the account number, for example: Account number
that was defined as 123456 will be sent as 3456.

 System 0 LARS 0–3

LARS1 0–7
LARS2 0–F
Use the one-digit system code to efficiently allocate transmitter
reporting among monitoring stations.

 Periodic Test 00 HR: 00–96

MIN 00–59
The Periodic Test enables you to set how often the system will
automatically establish communication to the monitoring station in
order to confirm operational functionality. The periodic test involves
sending the account number and a valid test report code (Contact ID
602).

 No. Comm. Parameter 060 0-255

Specify the timeout threshold for establishing communication between

the LRT and bus, which upon being reached, triggers an event report to
the monitoring station.

Page 157
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Control 060 0-255

 Disable Low Battery Y Yes/No

YES: [For use when LRT is housed in the main LightSYS™2 box] LRT
low battery trouble condition will not be regarded.
NO: [For use when LRT is housed remotely in its own box] LRT low
battery trouble condition will be regarded.

 Monitoring Station
The Monitoring Station menu contains parameters that enable the system to establish
communication with the (up to three) monitoring stations and transmit data.

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Report Type

Defines the communication type that the system will establish with each
monitoring station. The system can report in four optional
communication channels:
Voice
IP
SMS
LRT

NOTE: Above Grade 2 (i.e. for Grade 3), if there is a communication fault
with the monitoring station the panel will not be ready to arm. This
feature is automatically activated, and there are no parameters to set for
it.

Page 158
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Voice
Reports to the monitoring station will be done through the PSTN or GSM
network. Reporting by Voice can be established through different
channels. The optional channels depend on the hardware installed in
your system. Select the required channel as follows:
1. PSTN/GSM: The system checks for the availability of the PSTN
line. During regular operation mode all calls and data transmission
are carried out using the PSTN line. In the case of trouble in the
PSTN line, the line is routed to the GSM line.
2. GSM/PSTN: The panel checks for the availability of the GSM line.
During regular operation mode all calls and data transmission are
carried out using the GSM line. In the case of trouble in the GSM
line, the line is routed to the PSTN line.
3. PSTN Only: The outgoing calls are executed through the PSTN
audio channel only. Use this option for installations where no GSM
line is available.
4. GSM Only: The outgoing calls are executed through the GSM audio
channel only. Use this option for installations where no PSTN line is
available.
Enter the monitoring station telephone number including area code and
special letters (if required). If calling from PBX do not include the number
for outgoing line.
Function Results
Stop dialing and wait for a new dial W
tone
Wait a fixed period before continuing ,
Send the DTMF * character *
Send the DTMF # character #
Delete numbers from the cursor [*] 
position simultaneously

 IP
Encrypted events are sent to the monitoring station over the IP or GPRS
network using TCP/IP protocol. 128 BIT AES encryption is used. RISCO
Group’s IP/GSM Receiver Software located at the MS site receives the
messages and translates them to standard protocols used by the
monitoring station applications (For example; contact ID).

Page 159
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

Note:
To enable GPRS communication the SIM card has to support GPRS
channel.
Reporting by IP can be established through different channels. The
optional channels depend on the hardware installed in your system.
Select the required channel via the Configuration Software as follows:
1. IP/GPRS: The panel checks for the availability of the IP network.
During regular operation mode all calls and data transmission are
carried out using the IP network line. In the case of trouble in the IP
network, the report is routed to the GPRS network.
2. GPRS/IP: The panel checks for the availability of the GPRS network.
During regular operation mode all calls and data transmission are
carried out using the GPRS. In the case of trouble the report is routed
to the IP network.
3. IP Only: The report is executed through the IP network only.
4. GPRS Only: The report is executed through the GPRS network.
Enter the relevant IP and Port numbers for the MS that will receive
reports from the system. (See IP and Port)

 SMS
Events are sent to the monitoring station using encrypted SMS messages
(128 BIT AES encryption). Each event message contains information
including the account number, report code, communication format, time
of event and more. The event messages are received by RISCO Group’s
IP/GSM Receiver Software located at the MS/ARC site. The IP/GSM
Receiver translates the SMS messages to standard protocols used by the
monitoring station applications (For example; contact ID).This channel
requires that RISCO Group’s IP/GSM receiver has to be used at the MS
side.
Enter the relevant phone numbers for the MS that will receive reports
from the system. (See explanation in Voice type on page 171.)

 LRT
The LRT menu contains parameters for setting a system long-range radio
communication network, using the Location Aided Routing (LARS)
protocol (LARS, LARS1, or LARS2) or E-LINE protocol to facilitate
detailed event transmission to monitoring stations.

Page 160
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Accounts
The number that recognizes the customer at the monitoring station. You
can define an account number for each monitoring station. These account
numbers are the 6-digit numbers assigned by the central station
Notes:
Notes for Account Number in contact ID Communication Format:
• The account number will always be reported as 4 digits, for
example: A number defined as 000012 will be reported as 0012
• If more than 4 digits were defined, the system always sends the last
4 digits of the account number, for example: Account number that
was defined as 123456 will be sent as 3456.
• In Contact ID you can place digits and letters A–F. The A character
is always sent as 0 for example: Account number that was defined
as 00C2AB will be sent as C20B.
Notes for Account Number in SIA Communication Format:
• Account number for SIA should be defined as a decimal number
(Only digits 0..9)
• Account number can be reported as 1 to 6 digits. To send an
account number with less than 6 digits use the “0” digit, for
example: For account number 1234 enter 001234. In this case the
system will not send the “0” digit to the monitoring station.
• In order to send the “0” digit in SIA format, located at the left side
of the number, use the “A” digit instead of the “0” digit. For
example, for account number 0407 enter 00A407, for a 6 digit
account number such as 001207 enter AA1207.

 Communications Format

Enables the system to contact the monitoring station in order to obtain
details of the communication protocol used by the digital for each
account.
Note:
See Appendix D: Library Voice Messages
  Contact ID: The system allocates Report Codes supporting
ADEMCO Contact (Point) ID
  SIA: The system allocates Report Codes supporting the SIA
(Security Industry Association) format

Page 161
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Controls
Allows to program controls related to operation with the monitoring
station

 Call Save No Yes/No

YES: For reducing MS traffic congestion, the system holds all non-urgent
events (for example, opening/closing reports, test transmissions) for up to
12 hours (programmable) and sends them as a batch at a less busy time,
for example, at night. (Refer to Dialer: Periodic Test, page 163)
NO: All events are transmitted as they occur.

 Show Kissoff No Yes/No

YES: The keypad indicates when the dialer receives the kissoff signal from
the MS’s receiver.
NO: The keypad does not indicate on receipt of the kissoff signal.

 Show Handshake No Yes/No

YES: The keypad indicates when the dialer receives the handshake signal
from the MS’s receiver.
NO: No indication for establishing communication with the central
station’s receiver

 Audible Kissoff No Yes/No

YES: There is an audible sound emitted from the keypad when the dialer
receives the kissoff signal from the MS’s receiver.
NO: There is no audible sound on receipt of the kissoff signal.

 SIA Text No Yes/No

Yes: SIA format report to MS will support text transmission over the
voice channel. Note ( the MS receiver should support the SIA Text
protocol)
No: SIA format will not support text

Page 162
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Random MS Testing No Yes/No

Yes: At power-up the panel will random set a test time between 00:00
and 23:59. Once the hour is set, this will be the fixed report hour of this
panel. The time can be viewed under the Periodic test timer fields
(). The interval of sending the test will be as defined under the
Periodic Test timer
No: The periodic test will be according to the time defined under the MS
periodic timer ().

 Parameters
Allows to program parameters related to operation with the Monitoring
Station

 MS Retries 08 01–15

The number of times the LightSYS™2 redials the MS after failing to
establish communication.
NOTE: Above Grade 2 (i.e. for Grade 3), if there is a communication fault
with the monitoring station the panel will not be ready to arm. This
feature is automatically activated, and there are no parameters to set for it.

 Alarm Restore

Specifies under what conditions an Alarm Restoral is reported. This
option informs the MS of a change in the specified condition(s) during an
alarm restore. These reports need a valid Report Code.
  ON BTO (Bell Time Out) – Reports the restoral after the audible
alarm times out.
 FOLLOW ZONE – Reports the restoral when the zone in which the
alarm occurs returns to its non-violated (secured) state.
 AT DISARM – Reports the restoral when the system (or the partition
in which the alarm occurs) is disarmed, even if the siren has already
timed out.

 MS Timers
Allows to program timers related to operation with the monitoring
station

 Periodic Test

The Periodic Test enables you to set the time period that the system will
automatically establish communication to the monitoring station in order

Page 163
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

to check the connection. The periodic test involves sending the account
number and a valid test report code (Contact ID 602, SIA TX). Set the test
time and daily interval for Periodic Test Reporting.
Use the table below to specify the daily testing intervals (D)-effective
from the day of programming:
D Meaning
0 Never
H Every hour
1 Every day
2 Every other day
3 Every 3rd day
4 Every 4th day
5 Every 5th day
6 Every 6th day
7 Once a week

 Abort Alarm 15 secs 00-255 seconds

Defines the time delay before reporting an alarm to the MS. If the alarm
system is disarmed within the abort window, no alarm transmission shall
be sent to the MS.

 Cancel Delay 5 mins 00-255 minutes

If an alarm is sent in error, it is possible for the MS to receive a cancel
alarm code, sent subsequently to the initial alarm code. This happens if a
valid user code is entered to reset the alarm in the cancel delay time
window that starts after the defined abort alarm time is over.
Note:
Ensure that Cancel Alarm report code is defined.

 Listen In 120 sec 1–255 seconds

The time duration for the monitoring station to listen in and perform
voice alarm verification. After this period the system hang up the line.
The monitoring station can expand the listen in time during the
conversation by pressing the digit “1” on the telephone (for a repeatable
two minute extension). In this case, the Listen In time will reset and start
over again.
Pressing “2” during Listen In time will switch to Talk mode. Pressing “*”
during Listen In time will end the call.

Page 164
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Confirmation
The confirmation times relate to the Zone Sequential Confirmation
(Alarm Confirmation, see )

 Confirm Start (Confirm 000 1–120 minutes

delay time)
Specifies that the system cannot start a sequential confirmation process
until the timer has expired. This time starts when the system has set and
will prevent confirmed alarms being generated in situations when a
person has been accidentally locked in the building.

 Confirm Time Window 030 30–60 minutes

Specifies a time period that starts when an alarm is triggered for the first
time. If a second alarm is triggered before the end of the confirmation
time window, the system will send a confirmed alarm to the monitoring
station

 Report Split

The Report Split menu contains parameters that enable the routing of
specified events to up to three MS receivers.

 MS Arm/Disarm 1st backup 2nd

Reports Arming/Disarming (meaning Closings/Openings) events to MS
 Do not call (no report).
Send 1 : Reports Openings and Closings to MS 1.
st

Send 2 : Reports Openings and Closings to MS 2.

nd

Send 3 : Reports Openings and Closings to MS 3.

rd

Send all: Reports Openings and Closings to the all defined MS.
1 Backup 2 : Reports Openings and Closings to MS 1. If
st nd

communication is not established, calls MS 2.

1 st Backup 2nd3rd: Reports to MS 1. If communication is not established

calls MS 2. If communication is not established again calls the MS.

1 stBackup 3rd Call 2nd: Reports MS 1. If communication is not
established calls to MS 3. In addition it will also call MS 2.
2 nd Backup 3rd Call 1st: Reports to MS 2. If communication is not
established calls MS 3. In addition it will also call MS 1.

Page 165
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 MS Urgent 1st backup 2nd

Reports urgent (alarm) events to the Central Monitoring Station
 Do not call (no report)
Send 1 : Reports Openings and Closings to MS 1.
st

Send 2 : Reports Openings and Closings to MS 2.

nd

Send 3 : Reports Openings and Closings to MS 3.

rd

Send all: Reports Openings and Closings to the all defined MS.
1 Backup 2 : Reports Openings and Closings to MS 1. If
st nd

communication is not established, calls MS 2.

1 st Backup 2nd3rd: Reports to MS 1. If communication is not

established calls MS 2. If communication is not established again calls the

MS.
1 Backup 3rd Call 2nd: Reports MS 1. If communication is not
st

established calls to MS 3. In addition it will also call MS 2.

2 nd Backup 3rd Call 1st: Reports to MS 2. If communication is not
established calls MS 3. In addition it will also call MS 1.

 MS Non Urgent

Reports non-urgent events (supervisory troubles and test reports) to the
MS
 Do not call (no report)
Send 1 : Reports Openings and Closings to MS 1.
st

Send 2 : Reports Openings and Closings to MS 2.

nd

Send 3 : Reports Openings and Closings to MS 3.

rd

Send all: Reports Openings and Closings to the all defined MS.
1 Backup 2 : Reports Openings and Closings to MS 1. If
st nd

communication is not established, calls MS 2.

Page 166
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

1 stBackup 2nd3rd: Reports to MS 1. If communication is not

established calls MS 2. If communication is not established again calls the
MS.
1 stBackup 3rd Call 2nd: Reports MS 1. If communication is not
established calls to MS 3. In addition it will also call MS 2.
2 nd Backup 3rd Call 1st: Reports to MS 2. If communication is not
established calls MS 3. In addition it will also call MS 1.

 Report Codes

Enables you to view or program the codes transmitted by the system to
report events (for example, alarms, troubles, restores, supervisory tests,
and so on) to the monitoring station.
The codes specified for each type of event transmission are a function of
the central station’s own policies. Before programming any codes, it is
important to check the central station protocols. Reporting codes are
assigned by default, according to the selected communication format SIA
or contact ID.
Assigns a specified report code for each event, based on the reporting
format to the monitoring station. An event that is not assigned with a
report code will not be reported to the monitoring station. For list of
report events refer to Appendix E Report Codes
Using a double-zero (00) for any event will prevent a report from being
generated.

 Configuration SW
The Configuration Software menu contains parameters that enable the configuration
software to establish connection with the system.

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Security
Enables you to set parameters for remote communication between the
technician and the system using the configuration software

Page 167
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Access Code 5678

Enables you to define an up-to six-alpha-numeric-character installation

access code.
In order to enable communication between the alarm company and the
system the same access code must subsequently be entered into the
corresponding account profile created for the installation in the
configuration software
For successful communication, the access code along with the ID code
must match between the configuration software and the system.

 Remote ID 0001

Defines an ID code that serves as an extension of the access code.

In order to enable communication between the alarm company and the
installation, the same remote ID code must be entered into the account
profile in the configuration software.
For successful communication, the ID code along with the access code
must match between the Configuration Software and the main panel.
Dealers often use the customer’s monitoring station account number for
the ID code, but you can use any 4-digit code unique to the installation.

 MS Lock 000000

MS Lock is a security function used in conjunction with the configuration
software. It provides greater proprietary security when viewing
monitoring station parameters.
The same 6-digit code, which will be stored in the panel, must be entered
into the corresponding account profile created for the installation in the
configuration software.
If there is no match between the MS Lock code defined in the main panel
and the MS Lock code defined in the configuration software, the installer
will not have permission to change the following monitoring station
parameters from the configuration software:
MS Lock, Installer Code, MS IP Port, MS IP Address, MS Phone, Default
Enable, MS Account, MS Format, MS Channel, MS Backup, MS Enable,
Remote ID, Access Code.

Page 168
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Call Back Phones 0001

Define three numbers that the panel can call to perform Configuration
Software communication. If no numbers have been defined, a call back
can be performed to any phone. The installer will enter a phone number
when establishing communication to the panel. If at least one number
has been defined, it will be the only number that the call back can be
established to.
When the Configuration Software establishes communication to the
panel, it sends the panel its calling phone number. (This number needs to
be defined as My Number under the GSM and PSTN Communication
menu in the Configuration Software.)
If the panel identifies one of the numbers as one of the numbers
predefined in the panel, the call will hang up and the panel will call back
to that same number.

 Control

  Call Back Yes Yes/No

The call back feature requires the system to call back to a pre-
programmed telephone number to which the alarm company’s
configuration software computer is installed. This provides more security
for remote operations using the configuration software
YES: Call back is enabled.
NO: Call back is disabled.

  User Initiated Call Yes Yes/No

YES: For a remote Configuration Software session to take place, the grand
master must first enter specific keypad commands in the User Functions
mode.
NO: Configuration Software operations are possible without requiring
the user’s participation.

Page 169
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 IP Gateway
The IP and port address of the configuration’s software PC. If you have a
router connected to the PC of the configuration software, then you
should enter the IP of the router.
This definition will be used when there is a request to create a remote
connection from the panel to the configuration software. The connection
can be done over IP or GPRS.
Note:
In the configuration software, under Communication  Configuration 
GPRS you should enter the IP address of the PC that the software is
installed in.

 Follow Me
In addition to reporting to the monitoring station, the LightSYS™2 has a Follow-Me feature
which enables reporting system events to predefined follow me destinations using a voice
message, SMS message or Email. Up to 16 Follow Me destinations can be defined in the
system.
Note:
If FM is enabled and no voice module is installed then “beeps” will be sent instead of
messages.

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Define FM

Up to 16 Follow Me destinations can be defined in the system. Select a

follow destination from the list

 Report Type

Defines the type of reporting events to a Follow Me destination.

Page 170
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Voice
Report to follow me will be done by voice message thorough the PSTN or
GSM network. (See Channel For Voice Messaging below). Enter the
telephone number including area code or special letters for Follow Me
defined as SMS or Voice.
Reporting events by Voice can be established through different channels.
The optional channels depend on the hardware installed in the system.
Select the required channel as follows:
 PSTN/GSM: The system checks for the availability of the PSTN line.
During regular operation mode voice messaging is carried out using the
PSTN line. In the case of trouble in the PSTN line, the line is routed to the
GSM line
 GSM/PSTN: The panel checks for the availability of the GSM line.
During regular operation mode voice messaging is carried out using the
GSM line. In the case of trouble in the GSM line, the line is routed to the
PSTN line
 PSTN Only: The outgoing calls are executed through the PSTN
audio channel only. Use this option for installations where no GSM line is
available
 GSM Only: The outgoing calls are executed through the GSM audio
channel only. Use this option for installations where no PSTN line is
available

 EMAIL
Report to Follow Me will be done by e-mail thorough IP or GPRS. Each e-
mail contains information including the system label. Event type and
time. Enter the e-mail address for Follow Me destination defined as IP
type.
 IP/GPRS: The system checks for the availability of the IP network.
During regular operation, emails will be sent using the IP network line.
In case of trouble in the IP network, the email is routed to the GPRS
network.
 GPRS/IP: The system checks for the availability of the GPRS
network. During regular operation mode emails will be sent using the
GPRS. In case of trouble, the email is routed to the IP network.
 IP Only: The report is executed through the IP network only
 GPRS Only: The report is executed through the GPRS network only
Page 171
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 SMS
Report to Follow Me will be done by SMS. Each event message contains
information including the system label, event type and time. Enter the
telephone number including area code or special letters.

 Partition
Assign the partitions from which events will be reported to the Follow
Me number.

 Events
Each Follow Me destination can be assigned with its own set of events.
Choose the events that will be reported to each Follow Me

Event Description Default

Alarms
 Intruder Intruder alarm in the system Yes

Fire Fire alarm in the system Yes

Emergency Emergency alarm in the system Yes

 Panic (S.O.S) A panic alarm in the system Yes

Tamper Any tamper alarm in the system No

 Duress Alarm Duress alarm in the system from user xx Yes

 Confirmed alarm Confirmed alarm indication No

Arm/Disarm
Arm Arming operation has been performed in the system No

Disarm Disarming operation has been performed in the No

system
Troubles
False Code After three unsuccessful attempts of entering an No
incorrect code.
Event Description Default
Main Low Low battery indication from the LightSYS™2 main No
Battery panel (below 11V)

Page 172
 Installer Programming

Wireless Low Low battery indication from any wireless device in No

Battery the system

WL Jamming Jamming indication in the system No

WL Lost Wireless device lost. When no supervision signal is No

received from a wireless device
AC Off Interruption in the source of the main AC power. No
This activation will follow the delay time predefined
in the AC Loss Delay timer
Bell Trouble Bell trouble in the system

Bus Trouble Bus trouble in the system

Siren low Low battery indication from any sounder in the

Battery system

PSTN Trouble PSTN lost event. If PSTN Loss Delay time period is No
defined, the message will be sent after the delay time
 IP Network Communication trouble with the IP network. No

 GSM
 GSM Trouble General GSM trouble (Network availability, No
Network Quality, PIN code error, Module
communication, GPRS password, GPRS IP fault,
GPRS Connection, PUK code fault
SIM Trouble Any trouble with the SIM card No

SIM Expire Report to Follow Me will be established 30 days No

before the SIM Expiration Time defined for a
prepaid SIM card.
SIM Credit An automatic SMS credit message (or any other No
message) received from the provider’s number
predefined in SMS Receive Phone will be transferred
to the Follow Me number
Environmental
Gas Alert Gas (natural gas) alert from a zone defined a Gas No
detector
Flood Alert Flood alert from a zone defined as flood type No

Event Description Default

CO Alert CO (Carbon Monoxide) alert from a zone defined a No
CO detector

Page 173
Installer Programming

High Temperature High Temperature alert from a zone defined a No

Temperature detector
Low Temperature Low Temperature alert from a zone defined a No
Temperature detector
Technical Alert from the zone defined as Technical No

Miscellaneous
Zone Bypass Zone has been bypassed No

Periodic test Follow Me test message will be established No

following the time defined in the Periodic Test
parameter under the MS parameters
Remote System is in remote installation mode No
programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Restore Events

Choose the restore events that will be reported to each Follow Me
destination.

Event Description Default

 Alarms
 Intruder Intruder alarm in the system restored Yes
Alarm
Tamper Tamper alarm in the system restored No

 Troubles
 Main Low Low battery indication from the LightSYS™2 main No
Battery panel restored

WL Low Low battery indication from any wireless device in No

Battery the system restored

Jamming Jamming indication in the system restored No

WL Lost Wireless device lost restored No

Event Description Default

AC Off Interruption in the source of the main AC power No
restored

Page 174
 Installer Programming

Bell Trouble Bell trouble restored

Bus trouble Bus trouble restored

Siren low Siren low Battery trouble restored

Battery trouble
PSTN Trouble PSTN lost event restored No

IP Network Communication trouble in the IP restored No

GSM
GSM Trouble General GSM trouble restored No

 Environmental
Gas Alert Gas Alert restored No

Flood Alert Flood Alert restored No

CO Alert CO Alert restored No

High Temperature High Temperature Alert restored No

Low Temperature Low Temperature Alert restored No

Technical Technical Alert restored No

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Remote Control Yes/No

 Remote Listen No Yes/No

Enables the user of the Follow Me phone to perform remote listen and
talk operation with the premises.

 Remote program No Yes/No

Enables the user of the Follow Me phone to enter the remote operation
menu and perform all available programming options. For more details
see the LightSYS™2 User Manual.

 Controls

Allows to program control related to operation with the Follow Me

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Disarm Stop Follow Me No Yes/No

Page 175
Installer Programming

YES: No follow me report during Stay arming for alarm or tamper

NO: Follow me report for alarm or tamper will be established during
Stay arming. (Default).

 Disable Report at Stay No Yes/No

YES: No follow me report during Stay or Group arming for alarm or

tamper
NO: Follow me report for alarm or tamper will be established during
Stay arming.

 Parameters
Allows to program parameters related to operation with the Follow Me

 Follow Me Retries 03 01–15

The number of times the Follow Me phone number is redialed

 Voice Message Recurrence 01 01–05

This number of times a voice message repeats itself when establishing a

call to a Follow Me number.

 Follow Me Periodic Test 01–05

The Periodic Test enables you to set the time period that the system will
automatically establish communication to a Follow Me destination
defined with the Periodic Test event. (See page 163)

 Cloud 01–05

Define here the server settings for communication with the LightSYS™2
system

 IP Address 01–05

The IP address or server name. If the LightSYS™2 system is connected to

the RISCO cloud for self-monitoring, then use: riscocloud.com.
Otherwise enter the IP address or name where the cloud server is located

 IP Port 33000

The server port address

 Password AAAAAA Up to 6 characters

(case sensitive)

Page 176
 Installer Programming

Specify the password for server access. This password should be identical
to the CP Password defined in the server under the Control Panel Page
definition.

 Channel 01–05

Communication with the cloud can be established through an IP or GPRS

channel, depending on your system installed hardware.
 IP/GPRS: The system checks for the availability of the IP network.
During regular operation, cloud communication will be established using
the IP network line. In case of trouble in the IP network, communication
is routed to the GPRS network.
 GPRS/IP: The system checks for the availability of the GPRS
network. During regular operation mode cloud communication will be
established using the GPRS. In case of trouble, communication is routed
to the IP network.
 IP Only: Communication is executed through the IP network only.
 GPRS Only: Communication is executed through the GPRS
network only.

 Controls 01–05

The LightSYS™2 supports parallel channel reporting (via PSTN, IP, GPRS
SMS, or voice) to both the monitoring station and FM when connected in
cloud mode. Use this setting to decide if the panel reports events to the
monitoring station or follow-me in parallel to the report to the cloud or
only as a backup when the communication between the LightSYS™2 and
the cloud is not functioning.
Note: When the backup mode is functioning, the MS specifications are as
defined under MS menu (page 158) and Follow-Me menu (see page 170).
MS Call All
Yes: Parallel reporting to the MS can be established via both the cloud
and non-cloud channels.
No: Communication to the Monitoring station via the non-cloud
channels can be established only in backup mode (when LightSYS™2 –
cloud connection is down)
FM Call All
Yes: Parallel reporting to the Follow Me destination can be established
via both the cloud and non-cloud channels.
No: Communication to the Follow Me destination via the non-cloud
channels can be established only in backup mode (when LightSYS™2 –
cloud connection is down)

Page 177
Installer Programming

6 Audio
This menu is used to define voice message parameters.

Note
This menu will be displayed only if a voice module had been assigned to the system
The Audio Messages menu is divided into the following sub menus:
 Messages, below
 Local Announcements, page 180
 Messages
Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Messages
Use this menu to customize the spoken messages of Zones, Partitions,
Outputs , Macro's and Opening Message that the Voice module
announces when you access the system from a remote telephone or you
hear on the premises.
There are 2 ways to customize a voice message:
1. User recorded: The  Common Message and the  Library Messages are
user recorded messages. The recording can be done either from the
microphone located on the voice module expander or from a
microphone located on the Listen/Talk unit.

Note:
The definition of which microphone to use is determined by dip
switch 4 located on the voice module board.
2. Assign messages: The Zone / Partition/ Output and Macro messages
can be assigned with pre recorded messages. Each message can be
comprised of up to 4 words. Each word has been pre-recorded and
assigned a number. When comprising a message the installer will
enter the number of each word into the message sequence. The
system recognizes the numbers and sounds the words assigned to
those numbers. For example: For the system to sound “Top Floor
Guest Bedroom”, you should enter the following sequence: 119 050
061 019. The table in Appendix D Library Voice Messages displays the
directory of the pre-recorded programming descriptors, each is
identified by a 3 digit number.

Page 178
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

Note:
The first five descriptors allow for customized words specific for the
client’s needs. The customized words are the Library message on option

After recording or assigning a message you can verify messages by
selecting [1] Play option in each category.

  Common Message
User-defined identification of the premises, for example, the address
and/or telephone number of the premises. This message is up to 10
seconds long. The default Common message is Hello, this is your security
system calling.

  Zone Message
User-defined name for the zone in which the event occurred, for example,
Kitchen. The Zone message can be up to 2 seconds long, and is only
announced when the Event announcement message concerns a zone.

  Partition Message
User-defined name for the partition in which the event occurred, for
example, Kitchen. The Partition message can be up to 2 seconds long.

  Utility Output
Assigning voice messages for Utility Outputs simplifies the process of
remotely operating them by enabling the user to hear a meaningful name,
such as Heating, for each Utility Output.

  Macro
Assigning a voice messages to a Macro simplifies the meaning of the
macro operation for the user.

  Library Message
User defined messages for the customer needs. Each messages is self
recorded and can be up to 2 seconds long.

Page 179
Installer Programming

 Local Announcements
 Local Announcement
Upon event occurrence, the system can announce the security situation
to occupants of the premises by sounding a local announcement
message from the Add on Listen/Talk unit. This announcement
message can be enabled or disabled (via the toggle ), per event.
Enable or disable each message announcement according to your
customer request.
Parameter Description Default
 Intruder alarm Intruder alarm Yes
 Fire alarm Fire alarm Yes
 Emergency Emergency (medical) Yes
alarm
 Panic alarm Panic alarm Yes
 Tamper alarm Tamper alarm Yes
 Environmental Flood, Gas, CO or Yes
alert Temperature alert
 Away arm System/Partition armed Yes
in Away (Full arm)
 Stay arm System/Partition armed Yes
in Stay(Part set arm)
Disarm System/Partition Yes
disarmed
 Audible Status Status heard when Yes
pressing the status button
on the keypad/remote
control
Entry / Exit System in exit or entry Yes
delay
Auto arm System in auto arm Yes
process
Output On/Off Output activated or No
deactivated
Walk test Walk test. The Yes
LightSYS™2 will sound
the zone number and
description

Page 180
 Installer Programming

7 Install
The Install menu provides access to submenus that are used to add, remove or test
accessories in the system.
The Install menu is divided into the following sub-menus:
 Bus Device, below
Wireless Device, page 195
 Bus Device

The BUS Device menu provides access to submenus and their related parameters that enable
you to add to or remove BUS expansion modules. From this section you can also access
system tests to check the quality of their connections to the 4-wire BUS, as described in the
following sections:
This menu option allows you to set the of the LightSYS™2 installation device,
module and expander parameters and to verify the full operational functionality of
installed hardware
 Automatic
 Manual
 Testing

Bus Devices: Automatic Setting

EN 50131-3 Note:
The automatic setting/unsetting function is not in compliance with EN50131-3

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Automatic

The Auto Settings menu enables you to perform automatic setting of

the accessories connected to the system by using the BUS scanning
feature.

Note:
By default, when entering Installer mode with the default DIP Switch 2
in ON position, the system will take you immediately to Auto Settings.

Page 181
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 To automatically identify all the devices on the bus
1. Press to begin the automatic BUS SCANNING (the Auto
Settings process) in which it identifies all the devices on the
bus. A list of the accessories that were found is displayed
with the data definition that is required for each one.
2. Verify that the keypad displays all the devices you have
connected (displayed with the data definition that is required
for each one). If a device does not appear, ensure that you
have given it a unique ID.
3. Press to accept what is being displayed, to progress
through configuration screens and to advance on to the next
device found.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the presence of all devices has been
confirmed and all parameters configured.

Bus Devices: Manual Setting

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Manual
Use this option to manually add or remove a Bus accessory in the
system.

  Keypad

 STEP 1: To choose/modify a keypad type:

1. Through the menu selection, the following display appears:
KEYPADS:
ID=01 TYPE=

2. Use the or keys to position the cursor over the

keypad ID number for which you want to assign (or delete) a
keypad. The first keypad must be assigned to the first ID
number, which is 01

Note:
Make sure that the keypad's physical ID number has been "dip
switch" programmed as described in Setting Bus Accessory ID
Numbers, page 42.

Page 182
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

3. Place the cursor on the TYPE field and use the key to
display the following keypad selection options, navigating
with and :
 NONE
 LCD, LCDP (Model RP128KP / RP128KPP)
 LCDI , LCDPI ( Model RP432KP / RP432KP)
 WLKP (1-Way Wireless keypad)
 STEP 2: To Assign a Partition:
1. After pressing to store your keypad choice. The following
display appears:
ASSIGN TO PAR:
KEYP=01 PAR=1
2. Assign keypad 01 to the selected partition using the [1 to 4]
keys. This partition specifies the location of the keypad and is
mainly used for quick arming. Pressing the Arm Key
automatically arms the partition
Note:
1. Non-partitioned systems are regarded as Partition 1.
2. In partitioned systems, keypads can be selectively assigned to
specific partitions.
Press to store your choice
 STEP 3: To Assign Partition Accessibility:

Specifies the partitions that are controlled by the specified keypad.

Information about the selected partitions can also be viewed on the
specific keypad.
1. After pressing to store your partition choice. The
following display appears:
P=1234 KP=xx
YYYY MASK
2. For each partition (1 to 4), use the key to toggle between
[Y] YES and [N] NO

Note:
The xx represents the ID number of the keypad

3. Press . Define the keypad controls (Emergency keys,

multi view and Exit beep at stay. For more info see page 198).

Page 183
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

4. Press to repeat the process for other keypads in the
system (up to 4).
5. Press to return to the previous programming level.

  Zone Expander

 To choose/modify a zone expander

1. Through the menu selection, the following display appears:
ZONE EXPANDER
ID=01 TYPE=NONE

2. Use the or keys to position the cursor over the

Zone Expander's ID number for which you want to assign (or
delete). The first zone expander must be assigned to the first
ID number, which is 01.
Note:
Make sure that the Zone Expander's physical ID number has
been "dip switch" programmed as described in Setting Bus
Accessory ID Numbers, page 42.
3. Place the cursor on the TYPE field and use the key to
toggle between the options provided to select the keyboard
type, as follows:
• NZE08: 8 hardwired zone expander
Note:
When adding an 8-Zone Expander (NZE08) you should define
the EOL resistance compatibility for the zone expander itself,
according to the “highest” EOL level of any relay detector you
intend to connect to it. For example, if you have EOL, DEOL
and TEOL detectors connected to the zone expander (or if you
have only EOL and DEOL detectors, but you want to leave
open the possibility of adding a TEOL detector to the zone
expander in the future), you will need to set the zone
expander’s EOL resistance values to TEOL – the “highest” level.
4. Press to confirm (and store) your choice
5. Repeat the process for other Zone Expanders in the system

Page 184
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Utility Output

 To choose/modify a utility output

1. Through the menu selection, the following display appears:
UTIL OUTPUT:
ID=01 TYPE=

2. Use the or keys to position the cursor over the

UO's ID number for which you want to assign (or delete) a
utility output. The first UO must be assigned to the first ID
number, which is 01.
Note:
Make sure that the UO’s physical ID number has been "dip
switch" programmed as described in Setting Bus Accessory ID
Numbers, page 42.
3. Place the cursor on the TYPE field and use the key to
toggle between the options provided to select the UO type, as
follows:
• NONE
• UO04 (a 4-Output Relay-Type Unit)
• UO08 (an 8-Output Solid-State Type Unit)
• XO08 (the X-10 Transmitting Module)
• UO02 (2-Output Relay Type located on the 4A switched
power supply expansion module or wireless expander)
4. Press to confirm (and store) your choice.
5. Repeat the process for any other Utility Output modules in the
system (up to the system's maximum of four, depending on
your installed model).
6. Press to return to the previous programming level.
If a Utility Output module is found and NONE has been
selected, the following display appears:
**DELETE**
ARE YOU SURE? N
Press to return to the prior display.
-OR-
7. Press to select Y YES and press to confirm the
delete.

Page 185
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Power Supply

 To choose/modify a power supply

1. Through the menu selection, the following display appears:
POWER SUPPLY:
ID=01 TYPE=

2. Use the or keys to position the cursor over the

power supply ID number for which you want to assign (or
delete) a power supply. The first PS must be assigned to the
first ID number, which is 01.
Note:
Make sure that the power supply’s physical ID number has
been "dip switch" programmed as described in in Setting Bus
Accessory ID Numbers, page 42.
3. Place the cursor on the TYPE field and use the key to
toggle between the options provided to select the power
supply type, as follows:

• NONE
• PS02: 3A power supply

4. Press . The following display appears:

P=1234 PS=1
YYYY

5. Use the or keys and the key to assign the

partitions.
6. Press The following display appears:
Controls: PS=1
1)BELL/L.SPEAKN
If a bell siren or loudspeaker is connected to the Power Supply
module, press to select Y YES; otherwise, press .
Note:
If YES is selected, the system will look for, detect, and sound
any problems in the sounder circuit.
7. Repeat the process for any other power supply modules in the
system, up to the system's maximum of four, depending on
your installed model

Page 186
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

8. If a power supply module is found and NONE has been
selected, the following display appears:
**DELETE**
ARE YOU SURE? N

9. Press to select Y YES and press to confirm.

  Wireless Expander

The LightSYS™2 can support up to two wireless modules. Each module
can support up to 32wireless zones and 16 multi function key fobs (For
additional information refer to LightSYS™2 Wireless Expander Installation
Manual.)

 To Allocate a Wireless expander

1. Through the menu selection, the following display appears:

Wireless Module:
ID=1 TYPE=WM
2. Set the expander ID (1 or 2) and using , set the type to
WL and press .
3. The following display appears:
WME=X: BYPASS
BOX TAMPER ?
If the expander is mounted inside the LightSYS™2 box select
Y to bypass the box tamper. Confirm with
4. Repeat the process for the second wireless expander

  Proximity Key Reader

 To choose/modify a proximity key reader

1. Through the menu selection, the following display appears:
KEY READER:
ID=01 TYPE=PKR

2. Use the or keys to position the cursor at ID=1 and

type in the Proximity Key Reader ID number as defined by
the dip switches that you set when you installed the module.

3. With the cursor positioned at the TYPE field, use the key
to toggle and choose the PKR option

Page 187
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

4. Press . The following display appears:

P=1234 KR01
Y... MASK

5. Use the or keys and the key to assign the

partitions that will be affected by the instant arm function

6. Press . The following display appears:

Controls: PKR=1
Use the or keys to scroll the list and the key
to toggle and choose the required option
INSTANT ARM?
• If Yes, the partitions will be armed instantly.
• If No, the Exit Delay time period will be applied
SHOW READY?
• If YES, the ready status will be indicated on the
reader.
•
If No, no ready status indication will be indicated on
the reader
SHOW ARM?
• If YES, the Arm status will be indicated on the reader.
•
If No, no Arm status indication will be indicated on
the reader
SHOW STAY?
• If YES, the Stay status will be indicated on the reader.
• If No, no Stay status indication will be indicated on
the reader
SHOW BYPASS?
• If YES, the Bypass status will be indicated on the
reader.
• If No, no Bypass status indication will be indicated on
the reader

7. Press

Page 188
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Voice Module

 To specify the voice module expander parameters

1. Through the menu selection, the following display appears:
VOICE MODULE
TYPE=VOICE

2. With the cursor positioned at the TYPE field, use the key
to toggle and choose the VOICE option..
3. Press . The following display appears.:
ENTER R. PHONE
CODE: 00
4. Enter a remote phone code and press . The remote code is
used when calling the system from a remote phone.

  Sounder

 To specify and configure a sounder (siren)

1. Through the menu selection, the following display appears:

OUT DOOR SIREN:
ID=1 TYPE=NONE

2. Use the or keys to position the cursor over the ID

number to which you want to assign and configure the siren.

3. With the cursor positioned at the TYPE field, use the key
to toggle and choose the siren option:

• NONE
• SIRN (Prosound A)
• SIRN2 (ProSound B)
• LUM8 (Lumin 8, See page 55)

4. Press . The partition display appears:

P=1234 S=1
Y...

5. Use the or keys and the key to assign that

partition to the siren.

Page 189
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

6. Press . The following display appears.:

SIREN= 1
SOUND? Y

7. Use the key to toggle Y Yes or N No to activate or

deactivate the sound.

8. Press . The following display appears.:

SIREN= 1
SQUAWK SOUND? Y

9. Use the key to toggle Y Yes or N No. If yes, the siren will
sound one squawk to indicate the armed status.

10. Press . The following display appears.:

SIREN= 1
SQUAWK STROBE? Y

11. Use the key to toggle Y Yes or N No. If yes, the siren will
flash to indicate the armed status.
12. Repeat above steps for other sirens if needed.

  BUS Zones

Up to 32 addressable bus detectors can be assigned to the LightSYS™2.

Bus detectors can be wired to the main bus or to a Bus Zone Expander
(BZE).

For full installation instructions refer to the instructions supplied with

each bus detector.

 To specify and configure a bus zone detector

1. Through the menu selection, the following display appears:

BUS ZONE: (01)
(0:01)TYPE=NONE
Note:
The display "(x:yy) Type: None" represent the BUS detector
location in the system. In the 0:yy designation, the 0 represents
that the bus detector is on the main unit and is not assigned to a
Bus Zone Expander. The yy represents the bus detector ID
number (up to 32) as set by the detector's DIP switches..

Page 190
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

2. Use the or keys to position the cursor over the ID

filed and enter the Bus Zone ID number that you are assigning
or deleting. Make sure that the detector's physical ID number
is identical to the ID number you select during programming.

3. Using the arrow keys move to the Type field. Use the
key to toggle and select the detector's type:

 OPR12: WatchOUT PIR

 ODT15: WatchOUT DT
 WatIN: WatchIN
 ILun3: Industrial Lunar Grade 3
 iDTG3: iWISE DT Grade 3
 iQUG3: iWISE QUAD Grade 3
 iDTG2: iWISE DT Grade 3
 iQUG2: iWISE QUAD Grade 2
 BZ1: Single BUS zone expander

4. Press to confirm. Repeat the process for the other bus

detectors

Note:
The iWISE BUS detectors have additional input on board. When
selecting iWISE Bus detector the following question will appear: "Link
Bus Detector to zone xx? " Selecting Yes will assign the input as the
consecutive zone of the selected iWISE Bus detector.
For example: If Bus detector with ID 0:01 (Zone 1 in the system) is
defined as iQUG3 then the input of the zone will be assigned as Zone 2.

  GSM

 To specify and configure an installed GSM module

1. Through the menu selection, the following display appears:
GSM MODULE
TYPE=NONE

2. With the cursor positioned at the TYPE field, use the key
to toggle and choose the option for the GSM module installed.

3. Press to store your choice

Page 191
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

Note:
If a GSM module is found and NONE has been selected, press
to return to the prior display -OR- press to display a
confirm delete screen.

  IP

 To specify and configure an installed IP module

1. Through the menu selection, the following display appears:
IP MODULE
TYPE=NONE

2. With the cursor positioned at the TYPE field, use the key
to toggle and choose the IPC option.

3. Press to store your choice

Note:
If IP module is found and NONE has been selected, press
to return to the prior display -OR- press to display a
confirm delete screen

  Modem
The Fast PSTN Modem enables PSTN communication at 2400 Bps
between a remote PC and the LightSYS™2 security panel when
programming the system using the Configuration Software.
 To specify and configure an installed fast PSTN modem
1. Through the menu selection, the following display appears:
Modem:
TYPE=NONE
2. With the cursor positioned at the TYPE field, use the key
to toggle and choose the Modm option.
3. Press to store your choice

Note:
If IP module is found and NONE has been selected, press to
return to the prior display -OR- press to display a confirm delete
screen.

Page 192
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Bus Expander

The BUS Zone Expander enables to expand the number of BUS detectors
connected to the LightSYS™2 to 32. Up to 4 Bus zone expanders can be
defined. Each BUS Zone Expander creates a separate BUS loop that is
used only for the BUS detectors connected to it. The separate BUS loop
increases the total system security in case a certain BUS detector is
sabotaged.
 To specify and configure a bus zone expander
1. Through the menu selection, the following display appears:
BUS Expander:
TYPE=NONE

2. With the cursor positioned at the TYPE field, use the key
to toggle and choose the BZE32 option

3. Press to store your choice

  LRT (Long Range Transmitter)

 To specify and configure LRT

• Through the menu selection, the following display
appears:
LRT Module:
TYPE=NONE

• With the cursor positioned at the TYPE field, use the key
to toggle and choose the MAT option

• Press to store your choice

Bus Devices: Testing

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Testing

The testing menu is used to perform system bus and module testing,
scanning and verification functions

 Bus Test

The Bus Test menu enables the LightSYS™2 to check the

communication between the main panel and each of the system's

Page 193
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

expansion modules.
 To perform BUS test
Through the menu selection , the bus testing begins to
check the connections between the devices on the bus, and the
following display appears briefly:
BUS TEST:
>--XXXXXX--<
The system then displays the programmed device, its address, and the
quality of the communication, expressed as a percentage, as shown in
the following examples:
BUS COM QUALITY:
VOICE:01 =100% 
BUS COM QUALITY:
LCDPI:01 =99% 
A result of less than 100% means that there are bus connection
problems (for example, bad wiring or cabling located in a harsh
electrical environment or two modules in the same family have been
given the same ID number)

 Bus Scan

The Bus Scanning menu scans the bus and reports all modules found
 To verify the bus  expander connections
1. Through the menu selection, the bus scanning begins, and the
following display appears briefly:
BUS SCANNING:
XXXXXXXXXXXX
2. Scroll down the list of accessory devices to ascertain that all
keypads and expansion modules in the installation have been
detected by the scan, as shown in the following examples:
BUS SCANNING:
TYP=WM ID=01

BUS SCANNING:
TYP=LCPDI ID=01
BUS SCANNING:
TYP=VOICE ID=01
The system displays each programmed device and its address

Page 194
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Verify Module

The Verify Module menu provides a verification list of the modules in

accordance with the modules you defined in the  Bus Device
menu (page 181) automatically or manually.
 To verify the bus’s recognition of each programmed device and
its address
1. Through the menu selection, the following display appears:
VERIFY MODULE:
VOICE:01 =VOICE
2. Use the or keys to scroll down the list of displayed
accessory devices (shown in the examples below) to ascertain
that all keypads and expansion modules in the installation
have been identified correctly.
VERIFY MODULE:
LCPDI:01 =LCPDI
VERIFY MODULE:
WM :01 =WM
The system displays each programmed device, its address, and whether
or not it's found on the bus. This helps you to identify programming
mistakes.

 Wireless Devices

The Wireless Devices menu provides access to sub-menus that are used for
allocating and deleting wireless devices in the system. The Wireless Devices menu is
divided into the following sub-menus:
 RX Calibration
 Allocation
 Delete
Note:
Allocation wireless devices in the system can be performed only if a wires expander
module has been defined in the system.

Page 195
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 RX Calibration

Note
Allocation is step two of the three step Wireless Device Defining process.
See Step 1: Allocating a wireless expander  p. 187
Step 3: Allocation , below
The calibration measurement shows the amount of background ‘noise’
that the receiver can ‘hear’ on the same frequency as the RISCO wireless
devices. This ‘noise’ could be neighboring devices of another system or
other devices operating on the same frequency nearby. These are
‘unwanted’ signals that the LightSYS™2 wireless expander must be told
‘not to listen to’ in order to eliminate false jamming alarms.
The threshold noise level can be established automatically or manually
 To measure and set wireless device RF noise thresholds
1. Through the menu selection, the following display appears:
Choose Receiver:
1)ID:1 TYP:WM
2. Select the wireless zone expander for which you want to
establish the threshold level and press . The following
display appears, showing the current threshold level:
THOLD=XX WM1
RE-CALIBRATE? N
3. To perform a new automatic calibration, use the key to
select Y Yes. After the calibration process is finished, the new
receiving threshold is displayed, as follows:
THOLD=XX WM:1
NEW THOLD=YY
4. To confirm the new threshold, press , -OR- to change the
threshold manually, enter the required level and then press

Note:
In order to ensure that a momentary high noise level (due to
environmental reasons) will not cause a jamming alarm, you can
set the threshold level to be higher than the calibrated level.

Page 196
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Allocation

Note:
Allocation is step three of the three step Wireless Device Defining process.
See Step 1: Allocating a wireless expander  p. 187
Step 2: RX Calibration , above
Each wireless device must identify itself to the system receiver, in a
process termed “enrollment”.
Enrollment can be performed by sending an RF signal from each device,
or by typing the device’s unique serial code into the system. Enrollment
can be done locally using the keypad or remotely using the configuration
software.
LightSYS™2 supports up to two wireless expanders. If two WL expanders
are allocated in the system, the first screen in the wireless devices
allocation menu series requires you to specify to which receiver the device
should be allocated:
Choose Receiver
1)ID1 TYP:WM
Note:
The number of wireless expanders present affects only the total possible
set of keypads: two keypads per each expander for a maximum of four.
The maximum zones and keyfobs are irrespective of the presence or
absence of a second expander.

  By RF

 To allocate a wireless device:

1. Select 1) By RF and press .
2. Select the device to be used for the registration mode.
3. Select category ( 1)Zone, 2)Keyfob, 3)Keypad) and press .
4. Using the numeric keys, enter the desired device number and
press
5. The WL device is in learn mode. Send a write message from your
wireless device.

6. Continue entering the wireless zones attributes section.

Page 197
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 By Code

Same procedure as described in RF allocation (above) with the difference

that instead of sending RF transmission you should enter the 11 digit
serial number of the device followed by to confirm.

 Delete

Use this sub-menu to delete a wireless device.

8 Devices
The Devices menu provides access to submenus and their related parameters that enable you
to manually configure and modify installed system devices.
The Devices menu is divided into the following sub-menus (as per your set of system-
installed-devices):
 Keypad, below
 Keyfob, page 200
 Sounder, page 201
 Proximity Reader, page 207
 3A Power Supply, page 208

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Keypad

Select a keypad and press .

Parameters The following parameters can be defined for each BUS, 1-
Way and 2-Way keypads:
 Label: A label identifying the keypad in the system.
 Partition: This partition specifies the location of the keypad and is
mainly used for quick arming
 MaskingSpecifies the partitions that are controlled by the specified
keypad.

Page 198
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Controls
Advance through the parameters to be controlled:
 Emergency
The keypad’s emergency keys can be enabled or disabled per
keypad.
Yes: Enable the operation of the keypad’s emergency keys.
No: Disable the operation of the emergency keypad’s keys.
 Multi view (Bus)
Yes: The keypad will display the status of all masked partitions.
No: The keypad will display only the status of its partition.
 Exit beeps (2-Way with bypass unit;)— Sounds beeps during
exit time in stay arming.
 Serial Number : The identifying 11-digit number of the keypad
(display only)
 Function Key (2-Way)
 Disable
The keypad’s function keys can be enabled or disabled per
keypad.
Yes: Enable the operation of the keypad’s function keys.
No: Disable the operation of the keypad’s function keys.
Panic: Sends a panic alarm to the monitoring station
 M/S Listen/Talk— The system dials the Monitoring Station to
establish 2-way communication..
 UO Control 1 (2-Way): Assign outputs that will be activated by a
long press on key 
 UO Control 2 (2-Way): Assign outputs that will be activated by a
long press on key 
 UO Control 3 (2-Way): Assign outputs that will be activated by a
long press on key 
Slim 2-way Wireless keypad features:
• Label: provide a meaningful name (see page 63 for details)
• Partition assignment: (in most cases this is left as 1)
• Masking : enables user / keypad authorization granularity per
partition
• Controls: enables emergency, exit beeps
• Serial Number
• Function Key > panic , MS Listen-talk, Disable
• UO 1 – 3

Page 199
Installer Programming

 Keyfob
Options for the 1-Way Keyfob:
The keyfob menu defines the operation of the wireless buttons keys. Each
keyfob consists of 4 buttons, and each button can be programmed to
a different mode of operation.
1. The first step in the menu is to select a user. Each user has a single
keyfob. When selected press .
2. Select a button (1-4) and define the button operation according to the
options below. Note: Each key has its own list of options. The list
varies between the keys.
The available modes of operation are:
 None: Button disabled.
 Arm: The button is used for away (full) arming of the assigned
partitions.
 Disarm: The button is used for disarming its assigned partitions.
 Stay: The button is used for stay (home) arming of the assigned
partitions.
 Group: The button is used for Group arming (Partial arming
within a partition / area) of the assigned partitions.
 UO: The button is used to operate a single utility output
 Panic: The button is used to send a panic alarm.
Note:
Away or STAY arming can be defined as instant or delayed (Exit Delay).
The available options for each button are:
Button 1 (): None, Arm. Stay, Group, UO
Button 2 () : None, Disarm, UO
Button 3: None, Arm. Stay, Group, UO, Panic
Button 4: None, Arm. Stay, Group, UO
Options for the 2-Way Keyfob:
• Serial Num: displays the serial number
• Masking: enables user / keyfob authorization granularity per partition
• Controls : enables panic alarm
• Code: set the PIN Code for high security mode as per system or keyfob
flag settings
• UO Key (1/2/3): normally “disabled”

Page 200
 Installer Programming

Description of 2-Way Keyfob Options

Quick Option Description
Key
 Serial No The identifying 11-digit number of the keypad
(display only)
 Masking: Specifies the partitions that are controlled by
the specified keypad.
,  Controls Panic Enable: Disable/enable the issue panic
alarm button
 PIN code

 UO Key 1: The button is used to operate a single utility

output
 UO Key 2: The button is used to operate a single utility
output
UO Key 3: The button is used to operate a single utility
output

 Sounder
The Sounder menu enables to define all parameters of external sounder that can be connected
to the LightSYS™2 as a bus accessory.
The Sounder menu is divided into the following sub-menus
 Parameters
 Lamp Times
Note
Access to this sub-menu requires that a sounder device is installed on your site. For details,
see page 181

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Parameters
Use this menu to define all parameters of the siren. Note that some
parameters are only relevant to a specified siren.
Select a sounder and press .

Bus Sounder

  Label

As appropriate, rename the sounder’s label, as per the key definitions on
page 63.

Page 201
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Strobe

Use this menu to define parameters relating to the sounder strobe

 Control Follow Bell


Defines the strobe operation mode.
 ALWAYS OFF - The strobe is deactivated.
FOLLOW BELL — The strobe is activated when the siren bell is
triggered.
FOLLOW ALARM — The strobe is activated when an alarm occurs in
the selected siren’s partitions.

 Blink 40


Defines the number of times that the strobe will blink in a minute.
 20 [Times/Min]
30 [Times/Min]
40 [Times/Min]
50 [Times/Min]
60 [Times/Min]
 Arm Squawk 01 01-20 (seconds)


The time that the strobe will blink when the system is armed.

Note:
If the siren’s squawk strobe is defined as NO (Refer to the add/delete
module,  page 189) this parameter will be ignored.

Page 202
 Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

  Siren LED Follow Arm

Defines the operation mode of the Status LED2.

 ALWAYS ON — The status LED2 is always on.
 ALWAYS OFF — The status LED2 is deactivated.
 FOLLOW ARM — The status LED2 is activated when any of the siren
selected partition is armed (Away or Stay mode).
 FOLLOW ALARM - The status LED 2 is activated after any alarm
condition.
ALTERNATE (Only for Lumin8) — The status LEDs will constantly
alternate.
 FLASH (Only for Lumin8) — The status LEDs will constantly flash.
  Battery Load Test Every 24 Hours

Enables to set the time period that the LightSYS™2 will automatically
generate a Load test on
 NEVER: The system will not set a battery load test
 EVERY 24 HOURS
  Proximity Level 3 0-9 (seconds)
Response
(Only for ProSound)
Defines the time (seconds) for which a proximity violation must exist
before the siren triggers an anti-approach alarm. The option 0 indicates
that the proximity is deactivated.

  Volume 9 0-9 (seconds)

Sets the siren's internal speaker Alarm volume. The volume ranges
between 0 (silent) to 9 (Max volume). After setting/changing the volume,
sound will be emitted by the internal speaker to enable evaluation of the
selected volume level.

  Lamp

Use this menu to define parameters of the sounder external Lamp.

Page 203
Installer Programming

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Type


Defines the way the external lamp will be operated.
 ALWAYS ON–The lamp is always on.
 ALWAYS OFF–The lamp is always off.
 SCHEDULER– The lamp operates according to the time defined
under the Sounder Lamp menu (Quick Key: ).

 Brightness 05 (01–10%)


Used to set the brightness level of the external lamp.

 Power Source SAB SAB/SCB

(Only for Lumin 8)

Used to define the SAB or SCB power source mode of the LuMIN8.:
 SAB—Power supply for the sounder will be drawn from the control
panel.
 SCB—Power supply for the sounder will be drawn from the
sounder’s rechargeable battery.

 Siren Current Standard Standard/Low

(Only for Lumin 8)

Set the sounder current mode.
 LOW – The sounder output will be reduced to 106dB 150mA.
 STANDARD - The sounder output will be 112dB 350mA (assuming
single piezo head).

  Alarm Sound

(Only for Lumin 8)
Set the type of the alarm sound. Specify which of four alarm sounds is
associated with this siren.

Page 204
 Installer Programming

2-Way WL Sounders

  Label

As appropriate, rename the sounder’s label, as per the key definitions on
page 63.

  Strobe

Use this menu to define parameters relating to the sounder
strobe

 Control Follow Bell


Defines the strobe operation mode.
 ALWAYS OFF - The strobe is deactivated.
FOLLOW BELL — The strobe is activated when the siren bell
is triggered.
FOLLOW ALARM — The strobe is activated when an alarm
occurs in the selected siren’s partitions.

 Blink 40


Defines the number of times that the strobe will blink in a minute.
 20 [Times/Min]
30 [Times/Min]
40 [Times/Min]
50 [Times/Min]
60 [Times/Min]
 Arm Squawk 01 01-20 (seconds)


The time that the strobe will blink when the system is armed.
Note:
If the siren’s squawk strobe is defined as NO (Refer to the add/delete
module,  page 189) this parameter will be ignored.

Page 205
Installer Programming

  Volume

Sets the siren's internal speaker Alarm volume. The volume ranges
between 0 (silent) to 9 (Max volume). After setting/changing the volume,
sound will be emitted by the internal speaker to enable evaluation of the
selected volume level

  Alarm 9 (1-9)

General alarm volume

  Squawk 9 (1-9)

Squawk sound alarm

  Exit Entry 9 (1-9)

Notification of system status in exit or entry delay.

  Serial No.

The identifying 11-digit number of the sounder (display only)

  Supervision

Determines if this zone will be supervised by the system expander
according to the time defined under the timer RX Supervision (see page
73)..

 Lamp Times

Specify here the sounder lamp illumination duration.
 Lamp Start–Specify here the start time for the sounder lamp to be
activated.
 Lamp Stop ––Specify here the stop time for the sounder lamp to be
deactivated.

Page 206
 Installer Programming

 Proximity Key Reader

This menu enables to define or modify parameters of Proximity Key Reader that can be
connected to the LightSYS™2 as a bus accessory. Up to 8 PKR's can be connected to the
LightSYS™2.
From the menu Select a PKR and press .
Note
Access to this sub-menu requires that a Proximity Key reader device is installed on your site.

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Masking
Specifies the partitions that are controlled by the specified PKR.
Press to display the partition application screen:
P=1234 KR=1
Y MASK
Use the key to toggle Y/N)to set the partitions.

 Control

Use this menu to define controls of the PKR. Scroll the list and use the
key to toggle Y/N for each option. (See page 187)
INSTANT ARM?
SHOW READY?
SHOW ARM?
SHOW STAY?
SHOW BYPASS?
When done press to save your settings.

Page 207
Installer Programming

 3A Power Supply
This menu enables to define or modify parameters of 3A switched power supply connected to
the LightSYS™2 as a bus accessory. Up to 4 power supplies can be connected to the
LightSYS™2.
From the menu Select a power supply and press .

Quick Keys Parameter Default Range

 Masking
Specifies the partitions that the power supply is assigned to.
Press to display the partition application screen:
P=1234 PS=1
YYYY
Use the key to toggle Y/N to set the partitions.

 Control

Use this menu to define controls of the power supply. Use the key
to toggle Y/N for each option:
 BELL/L.SPEAK:

Page 208
 Using the Installer Non-Programming Menus

Chapter 5 Using the Installer Non-Programming Menus

This chapter describes the parameters and programming options available to the installer
that are not under the Programming Menu. .
Your LightSYS™2 comes with a variety of selectable functions available to the installer, user
and Grand Master. This section lists the complete menu of installer-configurable functions,
the most frequently used of which are described in detail in previous chapters of this manual.
The following table shows the installer-configurable keypad operations.

Activities Menu
Activities
Keypad Sound
Chime
Keypad Chime—Allows user control (turning ON and OFF) of the current
keypad's internal sounder for any function involving the Chime feature.
Partition Chime— Allows user control (turning ON and OFF) of all
keypad's buzzers in the partition for any function involving the
Chime feature)
Buzzer On/Off
Used to control the (Turning ON and OFF) the current keypad's internal
buzzer during both Entry and Exit Delay time periods and all fire and
burglar alarms.

Follow Me
Follow Me
Define
Destination: Used to define (up to 16) Follow Me destinations according to its type:
Voice message, SMS or E-mail. For more information, refer to page 170
Label: Identifying labels for the Follow Me destination. Fill in the labels according
to the instruction defined for user label on page 63
Terminate Follow Me
If Follow Me Destination(s) were chosen, their operation can be terminated. Use
this function when an alarm has been tripped and there is no need to utilize the
Follow Me feature.
Test Follow Me
Used to test Follow Me reporting.

Page 209
Using the Installer Non-Programming Menus

View Menu
View
Trouble
Should be used when the system has detected a problem, which is evidenced by the rapid
flashing of the Power icon, as described in the LightSYS™2 LCD Keypad Manual.
Alarm Memory
Displays the five most recent alarm conditions stored by the system
Partition Status
Allows the viewing of the partitions' status and all “not ready” zones in the
system.
Note:

• Pressing on the key from the normal operation mode displays the status
of the partition to which the keypad is assigned.
• Pressing the sequence [CODE] from the normal operation mode will
display the status of all the partitions assigned to the user code.
Zone Status
Allows the display of all system zones and their current status.
Service Information
Allows the display of any previously entered service information and the system version.
IP Address
Use this option to view the IP address of the LightSYS™2. This option is available only if
IP module is defined in the system.

Advanced
MS Test
Use this option to initiate a test message to the Monitoring Station according to IMQ and
EN50131 requirements

Page 210
 Using the Installer Non-Programming Menus

Clock Menu
Clock
Time & Date
Use this option to set the system time and date, in the format:
HH:MM DD/MM/YY. This definition is required for setting the scheduler programming in
the system.
Scheduler
Weekly — Enables you to define up to four weekly programs with up to two time
intervals per day, during which the system automatically arm/disarm, activates
utility output, or prevents users from disarming.
One Time — Enables a one-time operation of automatic arm/disarm of the system
at a specific time within the next 24 hours.
Vacation
Enables to define up to 20 holiday periods and the partitions that will be set automatically
during the holiday.

Event Log
Event Log
Allows the viewing of significant system events including date and time.
Notes
• The events memory cannot be erased.

• To skip 10 events at a time backward or forward, use the

consecutively

Maintenance
Maintenance
Walk Test
Enables to easily test and evaluate the operation of selected zones in your system.
Walk test is set for up to 60 minutes. During the last 5 minutes of walk test mode,
the keypad used to perform the walk test will indicate that the walk test is about to
end.
Full walk test — The test will display the detected zones and type of detection.
Quick walk test —The test will display the undetected zones

Page 211
Using the Installer Non-Programming Menus

Siren Test
Activates the alarm sound from each BUS sounder, from the Bell terminals on the main
board and activates utility outputs defined as Bell Trigger ( ).
Strobe Test
Activates all strobes in connected BUS sounders and activates utility output defined as
Follow Strobe ( ).
Zone Resistance
Tests the resistance and voltage level of the wired zones in the system. Use the key to
toggle between resistance and voltage of each detector
Diagnostics

Activates the relevant tests for:

Main Unit: Tests the standby battery level of the main board and the system
version.
Bus Zones: Performs a diagnostic test to the Bus zones in the system and displays
the relevant information for each detector.
Zone Expander: Performs a diagnostic communication test on installed zone
expanders and tests its version.
Power supply: Performs a diagnostic communication test on installed power
supplied expanders and displays the relevant information for each
power supply.
Siren: Performs a diagnostic communication test on installed bus sirens and
displays the information regarding each siren (depending on the siren
type).

GSM: Performs a diagnostic test for the following parameters of the plug in GSM
module:

 Signal (RSSI): Displays the signal level measured by the GSM module.
(0=No signal, 5= Very high signal)
 Version: Displays information regarding the GSM module version
 IMEI: View the IMEI number of the GSM module. This number is used
for identification of the LightSYS™2 at the RISCO IP receiver when using
GSM or GPRS communication.

IP: Performs a diagnostic test for the following parameters of the plug in IP
module:
 IP Address: View the IP address of the LightSYS2
 Version: View the IP module software version

Page 212
 Using the Installer Non-Programming Menus

 MAC Address: View the MAC address of the IP card. This number is
used for identification of the LightSYS™2 at the RISCO IP receiver when
using IP communication
Wireless: Displays the wireless module software version and enables to activate
the following tests for recognized wireless devices in the system
(keyfobs, wireless zones, wireless keypads).
 Communication Test— Displays the results of the last measurement
performed after the last transmission (last detection or last supervision
signal) of the selected device. To receive updated signal strength, activate
the detector prior to performing the communication test. For successful
communication, the strength of the signal should be higher than the noise
threshold level as measured during calibration of the main unit.
 Battery Test — Displays the results of the last battery test of the selected
device performed after the last transmission. OK message is displayed for
a successful test. For an updated value activate the device
Keypads: Displays the RP432 keypads software version number and momentarily
tests the keypad indicators.
Voice: Displays the voice module software version number and creation date.
LRT: Displays the Log Range Radio module software version and its active
protocol

Macro
Macro
LightSYS™2 enables the installer or Grand Master record a series of commands and
assign them to a macro. For more information refer to LightSYS™2 User Manual.

Stand Alone Keyfobs

Stand Alone Keyfob
LightSYS™2 enables the installer or Grand Master to assign up to 200 keyfobs that can be
used for gate control only (not for arming/disarming). For addition information refer to
LightSYS™2 User Manual.

Page 213
Technical Specifications

Appendix A Technical Specifications

Main Technical Information
Input Power: AC/DC Adaptor 100-240V 50/60Hz 14.4V—1.5A , 4A
Current Consumption: 60 mA, typical / 70 mA, maximum
Rechargeable Standby 1.5A PS: 12 Volts up to 7 Amp-Hours (AH), typical
Battery: 4A PS: 12 Volts up to 17 Amp-Hours (AH), typical
Power Outputs: Auxiliary Power:
1.5A PS: Total current 800mA; Maximum Aux =
500mA; Maximum BUS (AUX RED) = 800mA
4A PS: Total current 1500mA; Maximum Aux =
500mA; Maximum BUS (AUX RED) = 1000mA
Bell/LS (External): 12 Volts DC @ 500 mA, maximum
Programmable outputs: UO1: Dry contact relay (24V, 1 Amps)
UO2-UO4: 100 mA, opto relay
Main Box Dimensions RP432B Polycarbonate (1.5A PS): 290 x 254 x 97 mm
RP432BM Metal, small (1.5A PS): 264 x 299 x 80 mm
RP432BM1 Metal, large (4A or 1.5A PS): 420 x 379 x
95 mm
Operating temperature -10°C to 55°C (14°F to 131°F)
Weight 1.9 Kg (including battery)
Storage temperature -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
Keypads
LCD Keypad (RP432KP, RP432KPP)
Voltage 13.8V +/-10%,
Current Consumption LCD (RP432KP): 48 mA typical/52 mA max
Prox LCD ( RP432KPP): 62 mA typical/130 mA max
Main panel connection 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
Dimensions 153 x 84 x 28 mm (6.02 x 3.3 x 1.1 inch)
Operating temperature -10°C to 55°C (14°F to 131°F)
Storage temperature -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
Prox. RF frequency 13.56MHz
Touchscreen Keypad (RP128KP01, RP128KPP1)
Voltage 13.8V +/-10%,
Current Consumption RP128KP01: 30 mA typical / 180 mA Max
RP128KPP1(with prox): 30 mA typical / 280 mA max
Main Panel Connection 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel

Page 214
 Technical Specifications

Dimensions 210 mm x 152 mm x 20 mm (8.2" x 5.9" x 0.7")

Operating temperature -10°C to 55°C (14°F to 131°F)
Storage temperature -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
Prox. RF Frequency 13.56MHz
LCD Keypad (RP128KP, RP128KPP)
Voltage 13.8V +/-10%,
Current RP128KP: 100 mA maximum
RP128KPP (with prox) 250 mA maximum
Main Panel Connection 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
Dimensions 16.2 cm x 12.2 cm x 3 cm (6.37" x 4.8" x 1.18")
2-Way WL Slim Keypad (RW132KL 1/2 P
Voltage 3V (2 CR123 batteries in parallel)
Current Stand-by current 10μA, Max current 100 mA
Main Panel Connection Wireless
Dimensions 100 mm X 45 mm X 25 mm (3.9 i X 1.8 X .98 inches)
Zone Expander (RP432EZ8)
Voltage 13.8VDC +/-10%;
Current 25 mA, typical / 30 mA, maximum
Main Panel Connection 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
Dimensions 10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 1.8 cm
Utility Output Expanders
4 Relay Output(RP296EO4)
Voltage 13.8VDC +/-10%;
Current 25 mA, typical / 160 mA, maximum
Contacts 4 Form C (SPDT) Relays.; 5 A / 24V DC
Main Panel Connection 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
Dimensions 4.13" x 2.6" x 0.86" (10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 2.2 cm)
8 Transistor Output (RP296EO8)
Voltage 13.8VDC +/-10%;
Current 25 mA, typical / 160 mA, maximum
Contacts Open Collector, Active Pull-Down, 70 mA maximum
Main Panel Connection 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
Dimensions 4.13" x 2.6" x 0.7" (10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 1.8 cm)
X-10 Transmitter Module
Voltage 13.8VDC +/-10%;

Page 215
Technical Specifications

Current 30 mA, maximum

Main Panel Connection 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
Dimensions 10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 1.8 cm
Wireless Expander (RP432EW)
Voltage 12-14.4V DC VDC
Current Typical: 40 mA; 65mA maximum
Frequency RW432EW8 – 868.65 MHz; RW432EW4 – 433.92 MHz
RF immunity: According to EN50130-4
Range (L.O.S) 300 meters
Relay outputs 12VDC @ 1A max Dry Contact Relays
Operating temperature: -10°C to 55°C (14°F to 131°F)
Storage temperature: -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
Main Panel Connection 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
Dimensions 125.5 X 78X 25.5 mm (4.94 X 3.07 X 1 inch)
Proximity Key Reader (RP128PKR)
Voltage 13.8VDC +/-10%;
Current 70 mA, typical / 180 mA max
Main Panel Connection 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
Dimensions 40 mm x 43.6 mm x 22 mm (1.57“ x 1.7“ x 0.86“)
Voice Module (RP432EV)
Voltage 13.8VDC +/-10%;
Current 30 mA typical / 70 mA maximum
Operating temperature 0-70°C
Main Panel Connection 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
Sirens
* ProSound ( RS200WA, RS200WAP)
Input DC Power Regulated 13.5-14.2V, 200 mA maximum
Standby Current 54 mA + charge current
Consumption
Battery charging current 140 mA maximum
Operating Current 1.6A ((Sounder + Strobe))
Consumption
Speaker Sound level 106 dB @ 3 meters
Main Panel Connection 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
Dimensions 30.5 cm X 21.8 cm X 11.6 cm

Page 216
 Technical Specifications

* For full technical information refer to the manual of the siren

* Lumin8 ( RS200WA, RS200WAP)
Input DC Power Regulated 13.0- 14.2V
Current Consumption Single piezo: 350mA (Regulated)
Twin piezo: 450mA (Regulated)
Battery charging current 15 mA maximum
Speaker Sound level Single piezo: 111dbA Twin piezo: 114dbA)
Main Panel Connection 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* For full technical information refer to the manual of the siren
Singe Zone Expander (RP128EZ01)
Voltage 13.8VDC +/-10%
Current 20mA
Main Panel Connection 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
Plug In GSM (RP432GSM)
Voltage 13.8VDC +/-10%
Current Average: 30 mA
Peak: 160 mA
Dimensions 80 mm x 50 mm x 25 mm
Plug In IP (RW132IP)
Voltage 13.8VDC +/-10%;
Current Average 55 mA; Peak 105 mA
Dimensions 70 mm x 60 mm
Plug In Modem 2400 (RP432MD24)
Voltage 13.8VDC +/-10%;
Current 20 mA, typical / 60 mA, maximum
Dimensions 70 mm x 25 mm
BUS Expander (RP432EZB)
Voltage 13.8VDC +/-10%;
Current 20 mA, typical
Main Panel Connection 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
Dimensions 10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 1.8 cm
KP LRT (Long Range Transmitter)
Voltage 13.8VDC +/-10%;
Current 10 mA, standby / 1A maximum
Dimensions 227 mm x 173 mm x 124 mm

Page 217
LightSYS™2 Accessories

Appendix B LightSYS™2 Accessories

Keypads Description
RP432KP LightSYS™2 LCD keypad, slim
RP432KPP LightSYS™2 LCD keypad with proximity, slim (13.56
MHz)
RP128KP Touch screen keypad
RP128KPP2 Touch screen keypad with proximity (13.56 MHz)
RP128KCL LCD keypad
RP128KCLP LCD keypad with proximity (125 KHz)
RP128PKR Proximity Key Reader
RP200KT Proximity tags (13.56 MHz)
RP128KT Proximity tags (125 KHz)
RP132KL1/2P 2-Way Wireless Slim Keypad with Prox, (2–Outdor,
Black)
(1–Indoor, White)
Zone Description
Expanders &
Bus Zone
Expanders
RP432EZ8 8 Zone Expansion Module
RP128EZB Bus Zone Expander
RP128EZ01 Single Zone Expander
Wireless Expanders Description
RP432EW8 Wireless Expander , 868 MHz
RP432EW4 Wireless Expander , 433 MHz
Wireless Transmitters Wireless Transmitters Description
868MHz 433MHz
RWT920868 RWT920433 WL iWISE PIR
RWT92P868 RWT92P433 WL iWISE Pet
RWX34S868 RWX34S433 Smoke & Heat Detector 1
& 2 Way,
RWT72C868 RWT72C433 WL Universal Transmitter
RWT72M868 RWT72M433 WL Door/Window
Contact
RWT72P868 - WL Pulse Count
Transmitter

Page 218
 LightSYS™2 Accessories

RWT72X868 - WL Dual Channel

Transmitter
RW132KF2A RW132KF2H 2-Way 8 Button Remote
Control Keyfob
RWT4RCP8 4-Button RC Keyfob
with 2-Button Panic
RW132KF1A RW132KF1H 4-Button Rolling-Code
Keyfob, Black
RP128T4RC, RP296T4RC, 4-Button Rolling-Code
Keyfob, Gray
RWT51P8 RWT51P4 Wristband Panic
Transmitter
RWT52P868 RWT52P433 2-Button Panic Keyfob
RWT6SW868 RWT6SW433 WL Shock Detector
RWT6FW868 RWT6FW433 WL Flood Detector
RWT6C08 RWT6C04 WL CO Detector
RWT6G0868 RWT6G0433 WL Glassbreak Detector
RWT6GS8 RWT6GS4 WL Gas Detector
RWT312PR8 RWT312PR4 Wireless WatchOUT PIR
RWX312PR8 RWX312PR4 2-Way WL WatchOUT PIR
RWT9508 RWT9504 WL iWAVE PIR
RWT95P8 RWT95P4 WL iWAVE Pet
RWT9208 RWT9204 WL iWISE PIR
RWT92P8 RWT92P4 WL iWISE Pet
RWX73M8 RWX73M4 2Way Door/Window
Contact
Power Supply Description
Expanders
RP296EPS 1.5A supervised power supply, PCB only
RP296EPSP00A 1.5A supervised PS in metal box
RP432PS0000A LightSYS™2 Power Supply, EU
RP432PS00USA LightSYS™2 Power Supply, USA
RP128EPS 3A Switched Power Supply Expansion Module module
RP128EPSPUKA 3A Switched Power Supply Expansion Module in
tamper box (Medium UK )
RP128PSPSEUA 3A Switched Power Supply inside large metal box +
Tamper + transformer
RP128PSPSUSA 3A Switched Power Supply inside large metal box +

Page 219
LightSYS™2 Accessories

Tamper (No transformer)

Programmable Description
Output Devices
RP296E04 4-Relay Output Expansion Module
RP296E08 8 Open-Collector Output Expansion Module
Voice Unit Description
RP432EV LightSYS™2 Voice module
RP128EVL000A Listen and speak-in module
Proximity Key Description
Reader/Tag
RP128PKR3 Proximity Key Reader Kit 13.56MHz
RP200KT Proximity Keytags 13.56MHz (10 units)
X-10 Module Description
RP296EXT X-10 Transmitter Module
IP Module Description
RW132IP Plug-in TCP/IP Module
GSM/GPRS Module (2G) Description
RP432GSM Plug-in GSM/GPRS + Antenna
RGSMANT` External GSM Antenna with 3m cable
GSM 3G Module Description
p/n ……….

Fast PSTN Description

Modem 2400
BPS
RP432MD24 Plug-in LightSYS™2 Fast Modem
IP/AGM Description
Receiver
RP128IP0000A AGM/IP Receiver Software
External Sirens Description
RS200WA ProSound
RS200WAP ProSound with Proximity
RS200LW ProSound External Lamp
RS4012 Lumin8, 2 Piezo+Lamp
RS4022 Lumin8 Delta, 2 Piezo+Lamp

Page 220
 LightSYS™2 Accessories

Installer Tools Description

RP128EE Program Transfer Module
RW132EUSB Adaptor from panel to PC USB
RP132CB RS232 PC to Panel Cable

Bus Detectors Description

RK315DT WatchOUT DT + swivel

RK325DT WatchIN DT + swivel
RK312PR WatchOUT PIR
RK200DTG3 Industrial LuNAR DT AM Grade 3
RK815DTB iWISE Bus DT AM Grade 3 , 15m
RK515DTB BWare Bus DT AM Grade 3
RK825DTB iWISE Bus DT AM Grade 3 , 25m
RK800Q0B iWISE Bus Quad 15m (50 ft) AM Grade 3
RK500QB BWare Bus QUAD AM Grade 3
RK815DTB iWISE DT AM Grade 2 , 15m
RK825DTB iWISE DT AM Grade 2 , 25m
RK800Q0B iWISE Quad 15m Grade 2
RK66S RISCO Seismic Detector
Boxes Description
RP432B LightSYS™2 Polycarbonate housing
RP128B5 Plastic accessories box + tamper
Main panel and Description
Housing
RP432M LightSYS™2 Main Board
RP432B LightSYS™2 Polycarbonate Housing
RP432PS LightSYS™2 1.5A Power Supply
RP432PS15 LightSYS™2 1.5A Power Supply, without wall plug
RP432IN (xx) LightSYS™2 Literature Pack (language)
RP432BM1 LightSYS™2 Metal Housing
RP432PS1 LightSYS™2 4A Power Supply
RP432PS10UK LightSYS™2 3A Power Supply for metal housing., UK plug
VUpoint IP Cameras Description
RVCM11H0000A Indoor Cube IP Camera
RVCM52E0100A VUpoint Outdoor Bullet IP Camera
RVPS0000000A 12VDC/1A Switching DC adaptor with convertible plug
RVPSP0E0000A PoE injector with EU plug

Page 221
Wiring

Appendix C Wiring
The proper use of wire and cable is necessary for the successful installation and operation of
the LightSYS™2 system. It is important to select wire of the correct thickness to minimize
power loss and ensure reliable system operation. Take into account both the installation's
current requirements and the wiring distances involved. The following tables provide useful
information to help make your installation trouble-free.

AWG Wire Diameter Resistance: Resistance: Feet

Gauge Meters
Size
Millime Inches Ω Per Ω Per Ω Ω Per
ters Meter 100 Per 1000 Feet
Meters Foot
24 0.50 0.020 0.085 8.5 0.026 26.0

22 0.64 0.025 0.052 5.2 0.016 16.0

20 0.80 0.031 0.032 3.2 0.010 10.0
19 0.90 0.035 0.026 2.6 0.008 8.0
18 1.00 0.040 0.020 2.0 0.006 6.0
16 1.27 0.050 0.013 1.3 0.004 4.0
14 1.63 0.064 0.008 0.82 0.0025 2.5

Table A-1: Wire Facts

One-Way Wire Distance AWG (American Wire Gauge)

Between LightSYS™2 For best results use the indicated wire size
and Plug-In or larger (numerically lower) size
Transformer
In Meters In Feet 22 20 18 16 14
Up to 5 Up to 15 
5-8 15 - 25 
8 - 12 25 - 40 
12 - 20 40 - 60 
20 - 30 60 - 100 

Table A-2: Wiring Between the LightSYS™2 Main Panel and the Plug-In Transformer

Page 222
 Wiring

Wire Gauge Max Combined Length of ALL Expansion

Bus Wiring
24 AWG 7/02mm 150 meters 492 feet
22 AWG 16/02mm 200 meters 656 feet
20 AWG 24/02mm 333 meters 1092 feet
19 AWG 28/02mm 400 meters 1312 feet

Table A-3: Wire Gauge

Notes:
For maximum system stability, it is best NOT to exceed a total of 300 meters (1000
feet) of wire when wiring the Expansion bus.
For a distance of more than 300 meters, refer to RISCO Group technical support
service for detailed information.

Total Desired Wire Gauge in Particular Branch

Auxiliar
32/02 28/02 24/02 mm 16/02 7/02 mm
y Power
mm mm 20 AWG mm 24 AWG
(Max 18 AWG 19 AWG 22 AWG
Current
Draw Max Max Run Max Run Max Run Max Run
per Run
Branch) Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet

20mA 1195 3920 945 3100 750 2460 472 1550 296 970
30mA 793 2600 628 2060 500 1640 314 1030 197 646
40mA 597 1960 472 1550 375 1230 236 775 148 485
50mA 478 1568 378 1240 300 984 189 620 118 388
60mA 296 1300 314 1030 250 820 157 515 98 323
70mA 341 1120 270 886 214 703 135 443 84 277
80mA 299 980 237 775 187 615 118 388 74 243
90mA 264 867 209 687 166 547 105 343 66 215
100mA 239 784 189 620 123 492 94 310 59 194

Table A-4: Total Auxiliary Power

Note:
The wire lengths indicated represent the one-way distance between the source
of power and the last detector in the branch.

Page 223
Wiring

Max Desired Wire Gauge in Particular Branch

External
32/02 28/02 24/02 16/02 mm
Sounder
mm mm mm
Current
(Max Max Run Max Run Max Run Max Run
current Meter Feet Meter Feet Meter Feet Meters Feet
draw per s s s

branch)
100mA 238 780 191 625 151 495 94 310
200mA 229 390 95 313 76 248 47 155
300mA 79 260 63 208 50 165 31 103
400mA 59 195 48 157 38 124 24 78
500mA 48 156 38 125 30 99 19 62
650mA 37 120 29 96 23 76 15 48

Table A-5: Maximum External Sounder Current

Note:
The wire lengths indicated represent the one-way distance between the
LightSYS™2 and the external sounder in the branch.

Page 224
 Library Voice Messages

Appendix D Library Voice Messages

001 (Custom) E M 130 Store

002 (Custom) 046 East 087 Macro 131 Student room
003 (Custom) 047 Elevator 088 Magnet 132 Study
004 (Custom) 048 Emergency 089 Main T
005 (Custom) 049 Entrance 090 Master 133 Technical
A 050 Entry 091 Middle 134 Temperature
006 A 051 Executive 092 Motion 135 Third
007 Above 052 Exit N 136 To
008 Air conditioner 053 External 093 Near 137 Top
009 An F 094 New 138 TV
010 And 054 Family 095 North U
011 Apartment 055 Fence 096 Nursery 139 Under
012 Area 056 Fire O 140 Up
013 At 057 First 097 Of 141 Upstairs
014 Attic 058 Flood 098 Office V
B 059 Floor 099 On 142 Video camera

015 Baby's room 060 For 100 Outdoor W

016 Back 061 Foyer 101 Output 143 Wall
017 Balcony 062 Front 102 Outside 144 Warehouse
018 Basement G P 145 Washroom
019 Bathroom 063 Game 103 Panic 146 West
020 Bedroom 064 Garage 104 Partition 147 Window
021 Before 065 Garden 105 Passage Y
022 Behind 066 Gas 106 Patio 148 Yard
023 Bottom 067 Gate 107 Perimeter Z
024 Boy's room 068 Girl's room 108 Pool 149 Zone
025 By 069 Glass R Numbers
C 070 Guest 109 Rear 150 0
026 Camera H 110 Reception 151 1
027 Ceiling 071 Hallway 111 Refrigerator 152 2
028 Cellar 072 High 112 Relay 153 3
029 Central I 113 Right 154 4
030 Children 073 In 114 Roof 155 5
031 Cleaner 074 Indoor 115 Room 156 6
032 CO 075 Inside S 157 7
033 Computer room 076 Internal 116 Safe 158 8
034 Contact 077 Is 117 Safety 159 9
035 Control K 118 Second
036 Corner 078 Keyfob 119 Sensor
037 Curtain 079 Kitchen 120 Shock
D L 121 Shop
038 Desk 080 Landing 122 Shutter
039 Detector 081 Left 123 Side
040 Device 082 Library 124 Siren
041 Dining 083 Light 125 Site
042 Door 084 Living 126 Smoke
043 Down 085 Lobby 127 South
044 Downstairs 086 Low 128 Sprinkler
045 Dressing 129 Stairs

Page 225
Report Codes

Appendix E Report Codes

Report Codes
Parameter Contact ID SIA Report
Category
Alarms
Panic alarm 120 PA Urgent
Panic alarm restore 120 PH Urgent
Fire alarm 115 FA Urgent
Fire alarm restore 115 FH Urgent
Medical alarm 100 MA Urgent
Medical alarm restore 100 MH Urgent
Duress alarm 121 HA Urgent
Duress alarm restore 121 HH Urgent
Box tamper 137 TA Urgent
Box tamper restore 137 TR Urgent
Confirmed alarm 139 BV Urgent
Confirmed alarm restore 139 Urgent
Recent Close 459 Non- urgent
Main Troubles
Bell trouble 321 YA Non- urgent
Bell trouble restore 321 YH Non- urgent
Auxiliary failure 300 YP Non- urgent
Auxiliary restore 300 YQ Non- urgent
Bus failure 333 ET Non- urgent
Bus restore 333 ER Non- urgent
Low battery 302 YT Non- urgent
Low battery restore 302 YR Non- urgent
AC loss 301 AT Non- urgent
AC restore 301 AR Non- urgent
Clock not set 626 Non- urgent
Clock set 625 Non- urgent
False code 421 JA Non- urgent
False code restore 421 Non- urgent
Main phone trouble 351 LT Non- urgent

Page 226
 Report Codes

Report Codes
Parameter Contact ID SIA Report
Category
Main phone trouble restore 351 LR Non- urgent
RF Jamming 344 XQ Non- urgent
RF Jamming restore 344 XH Non- urgent
GSM trouble 330 IA Non- urgent
GSM trouble restore 330 IR Non- urgent
GSM Pre-Alarm Non- urgent
IP Network trouble Non- urgent
IP Network trouble restore Non- urgent
Arm/Disarm
User Arm 401 CL Arm/Disarm
User Disarm 401 OP Arm/Disarm
Stay arm 441 CG Arm/Disarm
Disarm after alarm 458 OR Arm/Disarm
Keyswitch Arm 409 CS Arm/Disarm
Keyswitch Disarm 409 OS Arm/Disarm
Auto Arm 403 CA Arm/Disarm
Auto Disarm 403 OA Arm/Disarm
Remote Arm 407 CL Arm/Disarm
Remote Disarm 407 OP Arm/Disarm
Forced Arm 574 CF Arm/Disarm
Quick Arm 408 CL Arm/Disarm
No Arm 654 CD Arm/Disarm
Auto Arm fail 455 CI Arm/Disarm
Detectors(Zones)
Burglary alarm 130 BA Urgent
Burglary alarm restore 130 BH Urgent
Fire alarm 110 FA Urgent
Fire alarm restore 110 FH Urgent
Foil alarm 155 BA Urgent
Foil alarm restore 155 BH Urgent
Panic alarm 120 PA Urgent
Panic alarm restore 120 PH Urgent

Page 227
Report Codes

Report Codes
Parameter Contact ID SIA Report
Category
Medical alarm 100 MA Urgent
Medical alarm restore 100 MH Urgent
24 Hour alarm 133 BA Urgent
24 Hour alarm restore 133 BH Urgent
Entry/Exit 134 BA Urgent
Entry/Exit restore 134 BH Urgent
Water (Flood) alarm 154 WA Urgent
Water (Flood) alarm restore 154 WH Urgent
Gas alarm 151 GA Urgent
Gas alarm restore 151 GH Urgent
Carbon Monoxide alarm 162 GA Urgent
Carbon Monoxide alarm restore 162 GH Urgent
Environmental alarm 150 UA Urgent
Environmental alarm restore 150 UH Urgent
Low Temperature (Freeze alarm) 159 ZA Urgent
Low Temperature restore 159 ZH Urgent
High Temperature 158 KA Urgent
High Temperature restore 158 KH Urgent
Zone trouble 380 UT Urgent
Zone trouble restore 380 UJ Urgent
Burglary trouble 380 BT Urgent
Burglary trouble restore 380 BJ Urgent
Zone bypass 570 UB Urgent
Zone bypass restore 570 UU Urgent
Burglary bypass 573 BB Urgent
Burglary bypass restore 573 BU Urgent
Zone supervision loss 381 UT Urgent
Zone supervision restore 381 UJ Urgent
Tamper 144 TA Urgent
Tamper restore 144 TR Urgent
Zone lost 381 UT Urgent
Zone lost restore 381 UJ Urgent

Page 228
 Report Codes

Report Codes
Parameter Contact ID SIA Report
Category
Low battery 384 XT Non- urgent
Low battery restore 384 XR Non- urgent
Soak fail 380 UT Urgent
Soak fail restore 380 UJ Urgent
Zone Alarm 134 BA Urgent
Zone Alarm restore 134 BH Urgent
Zone confirm alarm 139 BV Urgent
Zone confirm alarm restore 139 Urgent
No activity 393 NC Urgent
No activity restore 393 NS Urgent
Wireless Keypad
Tamper 145 TA Urgent
Tamper restore 145 TR Urgent
Keypad lost 355 BZ Urgent
Keypad lost restore 355 Urgent
Low battery 384 XT Non- urgent
Low battery restore 384 XR Non- urgent
Wireless Keyfob
Arm 409 CS Arm/Disarm
Disarm 409 OS Arm/Disarm
Low battery 384 XT Non- urgent
Low battery restore 384 XR Non- urgent
Wireless Siren
Tamper 145 TA Urgent
Tamper restore 145 TR Urgent
Low battery 384 XT Non- urgent
Low battery restore 384 XR Non- urgent
Siren lost 355 BZ Urgent
Siren lost restore 355 Urgent
Wireless I/O Expander
Low battery 384 XT Non- urgent
Low battery restore 384 XR Non- urgent
I/O Expander lost 355 BZ Urgent

Page 229
Report Codes

Report Codes
Parameter Contact ID SIA Report
Category
I/O Expander lost restore 355 Urgent
Tamper 145 TA Urgent
Tamper restore 145 TR Urgent
AC trouble 301 AT Non- urgent
AC trouble restore 301 AR Non- urgent
RF Jamming 380 XQ Urgent
RF Jamming restore 380 XH Urgent
Power Supply
Bell trouble 321 YA Non-urgent
Bell trouble restore 321 YH Non-urgent
Auxiliary close 301 AT Non-urgent
Auxiliary close restore 301 AR Non-urgent
Auxiliary failure 300 YP Non-urgent
Auxiliary restore 300 YQ Non-urgent
Overload 312 YP Non-urgent
Overload restore 312 YQ Non-urgent
Miscellaneous
Enter programming (local) 627 LB Arm/Disarm
Exit programming (Local) 628 LS (LX ) Arm/Disarm
Enter programming (Remote) 627 RB Arm/Disarm
Exit programming (Remote) 628 RS Arm/Disarm
MS periodic test 602 RP Non- urgent
MS keep alive (polling) 999 ZZ Urgent
Call back 411 RB Non- urgent
System reset 305 RR Urgent
Listen in begin 606 LF Urgent
Cancel Report 406 OC Urgent
Walk Test 607 BC Non- urgent
Walk Test restore 607 Non- urgent
Exit Error 374 Non- urgent
Enter Service Mode 393 LB Non-urgent
Exit Service Mode 393 LX Non-urgent

Page 230
 Installer Event Log Messages

Appendix F Installer Event Log Messages

Event Message Description
AC Low PS=y Loss of AC power from power supply ID=y
AC RST PS=y AC power restore on power supply ID=y
Activate UO=xx UO XX activation
Actv UO=xx KF=zz UO XX is activated from remote control ZZ
AL.ReinstateP=Y Alarm reinstatement on partition Y
Alarm Z=xx Alarm in zone no. XX
Alrm Cancel P=y Alarm is cancelled in partition ID=Y
AMPRX DTCT Z=xx Anti mask proximity detection on Bus zone XX
AMPRX RSTR Z=xx Anti mask proximity detection restore on Bus zone XX
ARM A:P=y C=zz Group A on partition Y is armed by user ZZ
ARM A:P=y KF=zz Group A on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ
ARM B:P=y C=zz Group B on partition Y is armed by user ZZ
ARM B:P=y KF=zz Group B on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ
ARM C:P=y C=zz Group C on partition Y is armed by user ZZ
ARM C:P=y KF=zz Group C on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ
ARM D:P=y C=zz Group D on partition Y is armed by user ZZ
ARM D:P=y KF=zz Group D on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ
ARM FAIL P=y Fail to Arm Partition X by Guard due to not ready zones
ARM:P=y C=zz Partition Y armed by user ZZ
ARM:P=y KF=zz Partition Y armed by wireless keyfob ZZ
Aut tst fail Failure of zone self-test
Auto test OK Automatic zone self-test OK
Aux RS PS=y Restore of Aux power on power supply ID=Y
Aux RS ZE=y Restore of S. Aux power on zone expander Y

Aux TRBL RS S=y Auxiliary trouble restore on the siren ID=Y

Aux TRBL SIR.=y Auxiliary trouble on the siren ID=Y

Bat Load RS S=y Battery load trouble restore from siren ID=Y

Bat Load SIR.=y Battery load trouble from siren ID=Y

Bat Rst PS=y Low battery trouble restore from power supply ID=Y

BELL RS PS=y Bell trouble restore in power supply ID=Y

Bell tamper Bell tamper alarm

Page 231
Installer Event Log Messages

Event Message Description

Bell tmp rs Bell tamper alarm restore
Box tamper Box tamper alarm from main unit
Box tmp rs Box tamper alarm restore
Bypass Box+Bell Box + Bell tamper is bypassed
Byp Trbl C=xx System troubles were bypassed by user XX
Bypass Zn=xx Zone no. XX is bypassed
Charge Curr S=y Battery charging trouble in siren ID=Y
Chng code=xx Changing user code XX
Change FM=yy Changing Follow-Me number YY
Charge Current RS S=y Battery charging trouble restore in siren ID=Y
Clk not set Time is not set
Clk set C=xx Time defined by user no. XX
Cloud Comm.Trbl Communication problems with the cloud channel
Cloud Connected Cloud communication channel is functioning
Cloud Disconnect Cloud communication channel is not functioning
Cloud Login Err Login problems with the cloud channel
CO Alarm Z=xx CO alert from zone XX defined as a CO detector
CO Rst. Z=xx CO alert restored from zone XX defined as a CO detector
Comm OK IPC Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and IP card
Comm OK KP=y Bus communication restore with keypad ID=Y
Comm OK KR=y Bus communication OK with Proximity Key Reader Y
Comm OK VOICE Bus communication OK with Advanced Voice module
Comm OK WME=y Bus communication OK with wireless module expander ID=Y
Comm OK BZE=y Bus communication OK with Bus Zone Expander ID=Y
Comm OK PS=y Bus communication restore with power supply expander ID=Y
Comm OK Siren=y Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and Siren Y
Comm OK UO=y Bus communication restore with UO expander ID=Y

Comm OK Z=xx Bus communication OK with Bus zone XX

Comm OK ZE=y Bus communication restore with zone expander ID=Y

Comm. OK GSM Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and GSM
Comm.OK LRT Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and the long
range transmitter
Conf. Z=xx Confirmed alarm occurred from zone XX
Conf. alarm P=y Confirmed alarm occurred in partition Y
Conf.holdup P=y Confirmed holdup occurred in partition Y

Page 232
 Installer Event Log Messages

Event Message Description

Confirm rs Z=xx Restore zone confirmed alarm
CP reset The control panel has reset
Dat set C=xx Date defined by user no. XX
Day A:P=y Daily arm on partition Y
Day Arm:p=y Daily Arm on Partition Y
Day b:p=y Arm by scheduler of group B on partition Y
Day c:p=y Arm by scheduler of group C on partition Y
Day d:p=y Arm by scheduler of group D on partition Y
Day dis:P=y Daily disarm on partition Y
Day hom:P=y Daily STAY or GROUP arming in partition Y
DC Restore Z=XX DC trouble restore in Bus zone XX

DC Trouble Z=XX DC trouble in Bus zone XX

Dis:P=y C=zz Partition Y disarmed by user ZZ
Dis: P=y KF=zz Partition Y disarmed by remote control ZZ
Duress P=y C=xx Partition Y duress alarm from user no. XX
DUST RST Z=xx Dust trouble restore from WatchOUT DT Bus zone XXX

DUST Z=xx Dust trouble from WatchOUT DT Bus zone XXX

EE AC.UPLOAD Load new parameters from PTM accessory

Enter progrm Entering installer programming from keypad or configuration
software
Exit program Exiting installer programming from keypad or configuration
software
F.Tr OK Z=xx Trouble restore in fire zone no. XX
F.Trbl Z=xx Trouble in fire zone no. XX
Fire Zone=xx Fire alarm in zone no. XX
False code kp=y False code due to 3 incorrect keypad attempts

False code kr=y False code due to 3 incorrect Access Control attempts

False rest.kp=y False code is restored for keypad

False rest.kr=y False code is restored for key reader

Fault z=xx Trouble in zone XX

Fire z=xx Fire alarm in zone XX

Fire kp=y Fire alarm from keypad (ID=XX) (keys 3 & 4)

Page 233
Installer Event Log Messages

Event Message Description

Foil ok Z=xx Restore in foil (Day) zone no. XX
Foil Z=xx Trouble in foil (Day) zone no. XX
Forced P=y Partition Y is force armed
Found Z=xx Wireless zone found, zone no. XX
Func=21 C=yy Activate UO by user YY
Func=23 C=yy Terminate FM by user YY
Func=24 C=yy User Init by user YY
Func=25 C=yy Hand Over by user YY
Func=26 C=yy Void report program by user YY
Func=35 C=yy NFA2P-View event log by user YY
Func=29 C=yy GSM reset SIM counter by user YY
Func=55 C=yy IP reset IP by user YY
Func=65 C=yy Update scheduler by user YY
Func=63 C=yy Next ARM by user YY
Func=64 C=yy Next DISARM by user YY
Func=22 C=yy Switch Aux by user YY
Func=43 C=yy Chime OFF by user YY
Func=44 C=yy Chime ON by user YY
Func=45 C=yy Global Chime OFF by user YY
Func=46 C=yy Global Chime ON by user YY
Func=41 C=yy Test Bell by user YY
Func=42 C=yy Battery test by user YY
Func=28 C=yy Enable UD by user YY
Func=22 C=yy Change FM by user YY
Func=51 C=yy Change code by user YY
Func=67 C=yy User limitation by user YY
Func=40 C=yy Walk test by user YY
Gas Alarm Zn=xx Gas (natural gas) alert from zone XX defined as a gas detector
Gas Rst. Z=xx Gas (natural gas) alert restored from zone XX defined as a gas
detector
GSM:GPRS PW ERR Authentication password is incorrect

GSM:GPRS PW OK Authentication password is correct

GSM:IP OK IP connection OK
GSM:IP Trouble IP address is incorrect
GSM:Mdl comm.OK Communication between the GSM/GPRS Module and the
LightSYS™2 is OK
GSM: Module comm. Internal GSM/GPRS bus module trouble

Page 234
 Installer Event Log Messages

Event Message Description

GSM:MS OK GPRS communication to the MS is OK

GSM:MS trouble GPRS communication failure to the MS

GSM:NET avail. GSM network is not available
GSM:NET avai.OK GSM Network is available
GSM:NET qual.OK GSM Network quality is acceptable
GSM:NET quality The GSM RSSI level is low
GSM:PIN cod.err PIN code entered is incorrect
GSM:PIN code OK PIN code is correct
GSM:PUK Cod err PUK code required
GSM:PUK Code OK PUK Code entered is correct
GSM:SIM OK SIM Card in place
GSM:SIM trouble SIM card missing or not properly sited
H.Temp rst Z=xx High temperature alert restored from zone XX defined as a
temperature detector
High Temp. Z=xx High temperature alert from zone XX defined as a temperature
detector
HOM:P=y C=zz Partition Y is armed in Stay mode by user ZZ

HOME:P=y KF=zz Partition Y is home armed using keyfob ZZ

HU.ReinstateP=y Hold-Up Reinstatement in partition y
IPC:DHCP error Failed to acquire an IP address from the DHCP server
IPC:DHCP OK Succeeded to acquire an IP address from the DHCP server
IPC: downld err IP Card generated a download error
IPC: download OK IP Card download was OK
IPC: evnt log ER IP Card generated an event log error
IPC: evnt log OK IP Card event log generated no error
IPC: hardware OK IP Card hardware is OK
IPC: hardware error IP Card generated a hardware error
IPC: mail error IP Card generated a mail error
IPC: mail OK IP Card mail is OK
IPC:MS=y error IP Card Monitoring station ID=Y generated an error
IPC:MS=y OK IP Card Monitoring station ID=Y was OK
IPC: Network err Failed to connect to IP network
IPC: Network OK Successful connection to IP network
IPC:NTP error Failed to acquire time data from the time server
IPC:NTP ok Succeeded to acquire time data from the time server

Page 235
Installer Event Log Messages

Event Message Description

IPC: upgrade err The IP Card upgrade generated an error
IPC: upgrade OK The IP Card upgrade was OK

IR restore Z=xx Trouble restore in the IR channel of Bus zone XX

IR trouble Z=xx Trouble in the IR channel of Bus zone XXX

JAMM. WME=y Jamming in wireless module expander ID=Y
KeyBox Open Zxx Zone XX of type key box is open
KeyBox Rst Z=xx Zone XX of type key box is restored

KP=$ Lost Keypad is lost

KP=$ Lost Rs Lost keypad has been restored

KP=$ LOW BAT. Low Battery trouble for the keypad

KSW A: Z=xx P=Y Group A in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX

KSW ARM:Z=xxP=Y Partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX

KSW B: Z=xx P=Y Group B in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX

KSW C: Z=xx P=Y Group C in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX

KSW D: Z=xx P=Y Group D in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX

KSW DIS:Z=xxP=Y Partition Y is disarmed by keyswitch zone XX

LB rstr KF=yy Low battery trouble restore from wireless remote control YY
L.Temp rst Z=xx Low temperature alert restored from zone XX defined as a
temperature detector
LB RSTR Z=xx Low battery restore from wireless zone XX
Lost Z=xx Wireless zone lost, zone no. XX
Low Bat KF=xx Low battery trouble from wireless remote control ID=XX
Low Bat PS=y Low battery trouble from power supply ID=Y
Low Bat RS Z=xx Low battery trouble restored from wireless zone no. XX
Low Bat Siren=y Low battery trouble from siren ID=Y
Low bat Z=xx Low battery trouble from wireless zone no. XX
Low Temp. Z=xx Low temperature alert from zone XX defined as a temperature
detector
LRT:ACCOUNT ERR The long range transmitter account generates an error
LRT:ACCOUNT OK The long range transmitter account is OK
LRT:HARDWARE OK The long range transmitter hardware is OK
LRT:HARDWRE ERR The long range transmitter hardware generates an error

Page 236
 Installer Event Log Messages

Event Message Description

LRT:LOW BAT The long range transmitter is experiencing low battery trouble.
LRT:LOW BAT OK The long range transmitter low battery in not troubled
LRT:NO BAT The long range transmitter is experiencing no battery
LRT:NO BAT OK The long range transmitter no battery is not troubling.
LRT:SYSTEM ERR The long range transmitter is generating a system error.
LRT:SYSTEM OK The long range transmitter system status is OK
Main Bell RS Bell trouble restore in Main Panel
Main:AC Rstr AC power restore on main panel
Main Aux Rst Restore of Aux power on Main Panel
Main: Bat Rst Low battery trouble restore from the main panel
Main: Low AC Loss of AC power from the main panel
Main: Low Bat Low battery trouble from the main panel
Main:No aux Failure in the Aux power on Main Panel

Main:No bell Bell trouble in Main Panel

Masked Z=XX Anti mask trouble from zone XX

MS=y call error Communication fail trouble to MS phone no. Y
MS=y restore Communication fail trouble restore to MS phone no. Y
MW restore z=xx Trouble restore in the MW channel of BUZ zone XX

MW trouble z=xx Trouble in the MW channel of BUZ zone XX

Next arm:p=y Partition Y armed in Next Arm mode

Next dis:p=y Partition Y disarmed in Next Disarm mode

No aux ps=y Failure in the Aux power on power supply ID=X

No aux ze=y Failure in the S. Aux power on zone expander Y

No bell ps=y Bell trouble in power supply ID=Y

No Com IPC Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and IP card
Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and keypad
No com kp=y ID=Y
Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and Key
No com kr=y Reader ID=Y
Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and the
No com voice Advanced Voice module
Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and wireless
No com WME=y module expander ID=Y

Page 237
Installer Event Log Messages

Event Message Description

Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and bus zone
No comm BZE=y expander ID=Y
Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and power
No comm PS=y supply Y
No comm Siren=y Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and siren Y
No comm uo=y Bus communication failure with UO expander ID=Y

No comm z=xx Bus communication failure with Bus zone XX

No comm ze=y Bus communication failure with zone expander ID=Y

No comm. GSM No communication between the GSM/GPRS Module and the
LightSYS2
No communication between the long range transmitter and the
No comm. LRT LightSYS2
No fault z=xx Trouble restore in zone XX (TEOL zone or Bus zone input TEOL)

No jam wme=y Jamming restore on wireless module expander ID=Y

No mask z=xx Anti mask trouble restore from zone XX
Nxt hom:p=y Partition Y is armed in Next Stay mode
Overld rs ps=y Overload restore from 3A SMPS Y
Overload ps=y Overload from 3A SMPS Y
Panic Z=xx
Phone fail If the phone line is cut or the DC level is under 1V
Phone restore Phone line trouble restore
PIR rstr Z=xx PIR trouble restore from Bus zone XX

PIR trbl Z=xx PIR trouble from Bus zone XX

Police KF=yy Police (panic) alarm from remote control YY
Police KP=y Police (panic) alarm from keypad Y
POT.LD RS PS=y Potential overload restore of 3A SMPS joined by 3A SMPS Y

POT.OVRLD PS=y Potential overload of SMPS joined by 3A SMPS Y

PROX FAIL S=y Fail in the proximity anti approach protection in siren Y

PROX OK SIREN=y Proximity anti approach protection is restored in siren Y

PROX TMP RS S=y Proximity tamper restore from siren ID =Y

PRX TMP SIREN=y Proximity tamper from approaching siren ID=Y

Page 238
 Installer Event Log Messages

Event Message Description

PS=yOVER.R C=zz Overload in 3A SMPS Y. Reset by user ZZ
Radio l.bat S=y Radio low battery trouble from siren Y
Radiol.bat rS=y Radio low battery restore from siren Y
Remote Prog The system has been programmed from the configuration
software
Reset: P=y C=zz Reset of partition ID=Y and user ID=ZZ
Restore Z=xx Alarm restore in zone no. XX
Rmt Arm:P=y Partition Y armed from the configuration software
Rmt Dis:P=y Partition Y disarmed from the configuration software
RMT Hom:P=y Partition Y armed in Stay mode from the CS software
SEISMIC OK Z=xx Seismic Test in Bus zone XX has been restored
SEISMIC TR Z=xx Seismic Test rouble in Bus zone XX

Self Fail Z=xx Bus zone XX has failed the Self Test

Self OK Z=xx Self Test in Bus zone XX has been restored

Siren=$ Lost Siren is regarded as lost following supervision test
Siren=$ Lost Rs The LightSYS™2 received a signal from siren after it has been
regarded as lost
Soak fail Z=xx Zone XX has failed in the soak test
Spec. KP=y Special alarm from the from wireless keypad Y
Spk Trbl RS S=y Speaker low battery restore from siren Y
Spkr Trbl Sir=y Speaker low battery trouble from siren Y
Spkr l.bat S=y Speaker low battery trouble from siren Y
Spkr l.batrsS=y Speaker low battery restore from siren Y
Start exit P=y Exit time started in partition Y
STU=Y Line Rstr STU adapter Y line restoration
STU=Y Line Trbl STU adapter Y line trouble
STU=Y R.RESET STU adapter Y line restoration reset
Tamper BZE=y Tamper alarm from bus zone expander ID=Y
Tamper Kp=y Tamper alarm from keypad ID=Y
Tamper LRT Tamper alarm from long range transmitter
Tamper PS=y Tamper alarm from power supply Y
Tamper Siren=y Tamper alarm from wireless siren Y
Tamper UO=y Tamper alarm from utility output expander Y
Tamper Voice Tamper alarm from Advanced Voice module
Tamper WME=y Tamper alarm from wireless module expander Y

Page 239
Installer Event Log Messages

Event Message Description

Tamper ZE=y Tamper alarm in zone expander ID=X
Tamper Zn=xx Tamper alarm from zone no. XX
Tech alarm Z=xx Alarm from zone XX defined as Technical
Tech rstr Z=xx Alarm restored from zone XX defined as Technical
TMP RS BZE=y Tamper alarm restore from bus zone expander ID=Y

TMP RS KP=y Keypad tamper restore

TMP RS PS=y Tamper alarm restore from power supply expander ID=Y

TMP RS UO=y Tamper alarm restore from UO expander ID=Y

TMP RS VOICE Tamper alarm restore from Advanced Voice module

TMP RS WME=y Tamper alarm restore from wireless module expander ID=Y

TMP RS ZE=y Tamper alarm restore in zone expander ID=Y

TMP RS ZN=xx Tamper alarm restore on zone XX

TMP RST LRT Long Range transmitter tamper alarm reset
Tmp rst Siren=y Tamper alarm restore from wireless siren Y
Unbyp Box+Bell Box + Bell reinstated from bypass
Unbyps Zn=xx Zone no. XX is reinstated from bypass
Unknown evnt Unknown event alert
UO REST ZN=xx A zone defined as “UO Trigger” has been deactivated

UO TRIG ZN=xx A zone defined as “UO Trigger” has been activated

VOC:COMM OK Bus communication OK with Voice Module
VOC:NO COMM Bus communication failure with the Voice Module
Water Alrm Zn=xx Flood alarm from zone no. XX
Water rstr Z=xx Flood alarm restore on zone no. XX
WEAK BAT PS=y Weak battery indication joined by 3A SMPS Y

Weak Bat RS PS=y Weak battery restore indication joined by 3A SMPS Y

Z=xx aut bad Zone self-test failed, zone no. XX
Z=xx auto ok Zone self-test OK, zone no. XX

Page 240
 Installer Programming Maps

Appendix G Installer Programming Maps

1) Programming See programming menu on page 242
2)Activities
Keypad Sound
Chime
Buzzer On/Off
Follow Me
View
Trouble
Alarm Memory
Partition Status
Zone Status
Service Information
Installer
System Version
Clock
Time and Date
Scheduler
Vacation
Event Log
Maintenance
Walk Test
Resistance
Siren Test
Strobe Test
Diagnostics
Main Panel
Bus Zones
Zone Expander
Power Supply
Siren
GSM
IP
Wireless
Voice Module
Keypad
LRT

Page 241
Installer Programming Maps

Installer Programming Menu

1) System
1) Timers
01) Ex/En Delay 1 062) RX Supervise 11) Last Exit Sound
02) Ex/En Delay 2 063) TX Supervise 12) Buzzer at Stay
03) Bell Timeout 064) Service Mode 13)Status Timer
04) Bell Delay 07) AC Off Delay 14) Service Timer
05) Switch Aux Break 08) Guard Delay 15) Payment Timer
06) Wireless 09) Swinger Limit 16) Pulse Open
061) Jamming Time 10) Redial Wait 17) Inactivity Timer
2) Controls
1) Basic
01) Quick Arm 08) Audible Panic
02) Quick UO 09) Buzzer  Bell
03) Allow Bypass 10) Audible Jamming
04) Quick Bypass 11) Exit Beeps at Stay
05) False Code Trouble 12) Forced Keyswitch Arming
06) Bell Squawk 13) Arm Pre-Warning
07) 3 Minute Bypass
2) Advanced
01) Double Verification of
Fire Alarms 15) Disable Incoming Calls
02) Alarm BUS Cut 16) Disable Keypad at Auto Disarm
03) Code Grand Master 17) Buzzer Delay
04) Area 18) Speaker=Buzzer
05) Global Follower 19) Confirm Speaker
06) Summer/Winter 20) Bell Confirmation
07) 24 Hour Bypass 21) Error Speaker Time Out
08) Technician Tamper 22) Tamper Report
09) Technician Reset 23)AC Trouble Arm
10) Engineer Tamper 24) Strobe Arm
11) Low battery Arming 25) Final Night
12) Bell 30/10 26) Stay Strobe
13) Fire Temporal Pattern 27) Blank Display
14) IMQ Install
3) Communication
1) Monitoring Station Enable
2) Follow Me Enable
3) Configuration Software
4) EN 50131
1) Authorize Installer 6) Exit Alarm
2) Override Trouble 7) Entry Alarm
3) Restore Alarm 8) 20 minutes signal
4) Mandatory Event Log 9) Attenuation
5) Restore Troubles
5) PD6662:2010
1) Bypass Exit/Entry 4) Installer Confirmation
2) Entry Disable 5) Key switch Lock
3) Route Disable 6) Entry Disarm
6) CP-01
1) Exit Restart
2) Auto Stay

Page 242
 Installer Programming Maps

7) Device
1) Anti Mask Tamper
2) Proximity Anti Mask = Tamper
3) Audible Proximity Tamper
3) Labels
1) System 3) Partition 2 5) Partition 4
2) Partition 1 4) Partition 3
4) Sounds
1) Tamper Sound
1) During Disarm 2) During Arm
1)Silent 1)Silent
2) Bell 2) Bell
3) Buzzer (main) 3) Buzzer (main)
4) Bell + Buzzer 4) Bell + Buzzer
2) Speaker Volume
1) Trouble 3) Exit/Entry
2) Chime 4) Alarm
3) Wireless Lost Sound
1) As trouble 2) As tamper
5) Settings
1) DIP 2 Enable/Disable 3) Erase Wireless 5) Customer
2) Default Panel 4) Standard 6) Language
6) Automatic Clock
1) Server
1) NTP 2) DAYTIME
2) Host
3) Port
4) Time Zone (GMT)
7) Service Info.
1) Name
2) Phone
8) Firmware Update
1) Server IP
2) Server port
3) File name
4) Download Files 1) Via IP 2) Via GPRS

Page 243
Installer Programming Maps

2) Zones
1) Parameters
1) One By One
2) By Category
1) Label
2) Partition
3) Type
00) Not Used 18) Special
01) Exit/Entry 1 19) Pulsed Keyswitch
02) Exit/Entry 2 20) Final Exit
03) Exit(OP)/Entry 1 21) Latch Keyswitch
04) Exit(OP)/Entry 2 22) Entry Follwer+ Stay
05) Entry Follower 23) Pulsed Keyswitch Delay
06) Instant 24) Latch Keyswitch Delay
07) I+ Exit/Entry 1 25) Tamper
08) I+ Exit/Entry 2 26) Technical
09) I+Exit(OP)/Entry1 27) Water
10) I+Exit (OP)/Entry2 28) Gas
11) I + Entry Follow 29) CO
12) I+ Instant 30) Exit Term
13) UO Trigger 31) High Temperature
14) Day Zone 32) Low Temperature
15) 24 Hours 33) Key Box
16) Fire 34) Keyswitch Arm
17) Panic 35) Keyswitch Delayed Arm
4) Sound
1) At Arm
2) At Stay
3) At Disarm
5) Termination
01) N/C 04) N/O
02) EOL 05 TEOL
03) DEOL
6) Loop Response
7) Advanced
1) Forced Arming
2) Pulsed Counter
3) Abort Alarm
3) Abort Alarm
4) BUS Zones Parameters
5) Wireless Zones Parameters
3) Resistance
2) Testing
1) Self Test
2) Soak Test
3) Cross Zones
4) Alarm confirm
1) Confirm partition
2) Confirm zones

Page 244
 Installer Programming Maps

3) Outputs
0) Nothing
1) Follow System
01) Bell 09) Bell Burglary 17) Panic
02) No Telephone Line 10) Scheduler 18) Fire
03) Comm. Failure 11) Switched Aux 19) Special
04) Trouble 12) GSM Error 20) 24 Hours
05) Main Low Bat 13) Bell Test
06) AC Loss 14) Installation
07) Sensors Test 15) Walk Test
08) Battery Test 16) Burglary
2) Follow Partition
01) Ready 11) Fire Trouble 21) Zone Loss Alarm
02) Alarm 12) Day (Zone) Trouble 22) Bell Trigger
03) Arm 13) Trouble 23) Strobe Trigger
04) Burglary 14) Stay 24) Fail To Arm
05) Fire 15) Tamper 25) Confirmed Alarm
06) Panic 16) Disarm 26) Duress
07) Special Emergency 17) Bell
08) Buzzer 18) Bell Stay Off
09) Chime 19) Zone Bypass
10) Exit/Entry 20) Auto Arm Alarm
3) Follow Zone
1) Zone Follow 3) Arm Follow
2) Alarm Follow 4) Disarm Follow
4) Follow Code

4) Codes
1) User
1) Partition
2) Authority Level
2) Grand Master
3) Installer
4) Sub Installer
5) Code Length
1) 4 Digits
2) 6 Digits

Page 245
Installer Programming Maps

5) Communication
1) Method
1) PSTN
1) Timers
1) PSTN Lost Delay
2) Wait Dial Tone
2) Control
1) Alarm Phone Line
2) Answering machine
override
2) Parameters
1) Dial Method
2) Rings To Answer
3) Area Code
4) PBX Prefix
5) Call Wait
2) GSM
1) Timers
1) GSM Lost
2) GSM Net Loss
2) GPRS
1) APN Code
2) APN User Name
3) APN Password
3) Email
1) Mail Host
2) SMTP Port
3) Email Address
4) SMTP User name
5) SMTP Password
4) Controls
1) Caller ID
5) Parameters
1) PIN Code
2) SIM Number
3) SMS Center Phone
4) GSM RSSI
6) Pre Pay SIM
1) Get Credit by
2) Phone To Send
3) Phone To Receive
4) SMS Message
3) IP
1) IP Configuration
1) Obtain IP
2) Panel Port
3) Panel IP
4) Subnet Mask
5) Gateway
6) DNS Primary
7) DNS Secondary
2) Email

Page 246
 Installer Programming Maps

1) Mail Host
2) SMTP Port
3) Email Address
4) SMTP Name
5) SMTP Password
3) Host Name
4) MS Polling
1) Primary
2) Secondary
3) Backup
4) LRT
1) Account
2) System
3) Periodic Test
4) No Comm Parm
5) Control
1) Disable Low Battery
2) Monitoring Station
1) Report Type
1) Voice
1) PSTN/GSM
2) GSM/PSTN
3) PSTN Only
4) GSM Only
2) IP
1) IP/GPRS
2) GPRS/IP
3) IP Only
4) GPRS Only
3) SMS
4) Radio
2) Accounts
3) Comm. Format
1) Contact ID
2) SIA
4) Controls
1) Call Save
2) Show Kissoff
3)Show Handshake
4) Audible Kissoff
5) SIA Text
6) Random Periodic test
5) Parameters
1) MS Retries
2) Alarm Restore
1) On Bell Time out
2) Follow Zone

3) At Disarm
6) MS Times
1) Periodic Test
2) Abort Alarm

Page 247
Installer Programming Maps

3) Cancel Delay
4) Listen In
5) Confirmation
7) Report Split
1) MS Arm/Disarm
2) MS Urgent
3) MS Non Urgent
8) Report Codes
1) Edit Codes
2) Delete All
3) Configuration Soft.
1) Security
1) Access code
2) Remote ID
3) MS Lock
2) Call Back Phones
3) Control
1) Call Back
2) User Initiate Call
4) IP Gateway
1) IP Address
2) IP Port
4) Follow Me
1) Define
1) Report Type
1) Voice
2) Email
3) SMS
2) Partition
3) Events
4) Restore Events
5) Remote Control
1) Remote Listen
2) Remote Program
2) Controls
1)Disarm Stop FM
2) Disable report at Stay
3) Parameters
1) FM Retries
2) Voice Msg. Recurrence
3) Periodic Test
5) Cloud
1) IP Address
2) IP Port
3) Password
4) Channel
5) Controls
6) Audio
1) Messages
1) Common 4) Output
2)Zone 5) Macro
3)Partition 6) Library Message

Page 248
 Installer Programming Maps

2) Local Announce
7) Install
1) Bus Device
1) Automatic
2)Manual
01) Keypad 09) Bus Zone
02) Zone Expander 10) GSM
03) Utility Output 11) IP
04) Power Supply 12) Modem
05) Wireless Expander 13) Bus Expanderr
06) Proximity Key Reader 14) LRT
07) Voice Module
08) Sounder
3) Testing
1) Bus Test 3) Verify Module
2) Bus Scan
2) Wireless Device
1) RX Calibration
2) Allocation
7221) By RF 1) Zone 2) Keyfob 3) Keypad
7222) By Code 1) Zone 2) Keyfob 3) Keypad
3) Delete
8) Devices
1) Keypad
1) Parameters
1) Label
2) Partition
3, Masking
4) Controls
1) Emergency 2) Multi view 3) Exit beeps
5) Serial Number (display only)
6) Function Key (Two-way)
1) Disable 2) Panic 3) M/S Listen Talk
7 – 9) UO Control 1-3
2) Keyfob (1-Way) 0)None 1) Arm 2) Disarm 3) Stay 4) Group 5) UO 6) Panic  
(2-Way) 1) Label 5) Serial No. 6) Masking 7) ControlsPanic 8) PIN Code 9–11) UO Key1–3
3) Sounder
1) Parameter
83101) Label
83102) Strobe
83103) Siren LED
1) Always On 2) Always Off 3) Follow Arm 4)
Follow Alarm
83104) Battery Load Test 1) Never 2) Every 24 hours
83105) Proximity Level Response
83106) Volume
83107) Lamp

831071) Type 1)
Always On 2)
Always Off 3)
Scheduler

Page 249
Installer Programming Maps

831072) Brightness
83108 Power Source 1) SAB 2) SCB
83109) Siren Current 1) Low 2) Standard
83110) Alarm Sound 1) – 4)
2) Lamp Times 1) Lamp Start 2) Lamp Stop
4) Proximity Reader
1) Masking
2) Controls
5) Power Supply
1) Masking
2) Controls 1) Bell / L Speak
0) Exit

Page 250
 EN 50131 and EN 50136 Compliance

Appendix H EN 50131 and EN 50136 Compliance

Compliance Statement
Hereby, RISCO Group declares that the LightSYS™2 series of central units and accessories are
designed to comply with:

EN50131-1, EN50131-3 Grade 2

EN50130-5 Environmental class II
EN50131-6 Type A, EN50136-2 and EN50131-10
UK: BS 8243:2010, PD 6662:2010, ACPO (Police)
ATS 5 for IP/GPRS; ATS 2 for PSTN
ATS EN50136-1 Category C (PSTN, GSM, IP transmission paths in parallel)
Signaling security: - Substitution security S2
- Information security I3
EN50136 Compliance
IP and GSM modules are complying with the following standards:

• EN50136-1:2012

• EN50136-1-2:2013

• EN50136-10:2014

Possible logical keys calculations:

Logical codes are codes punched in the wireless keypad to allow Level 2 (users) and
Level 3 (installer) access.
All codes - 4 digits structure: xxxx
0-9 can be used for each digit.
There are no disallowed codes - codes from 0001 to 9999 are acceptable.
Invalid codes cannot be created due to the fact that after the code 4th digit has been
punched, "Enter" is automatically applied. Code is rejected when trying to create a non
existing code.

Possible physical keys calculations:

Physical keys are implemented in the Wireless Keyfobs.
It is assumed that only a user possesses a Keyfobs, therefore a physical key is
considered as access Level 2
Each Keyfob has 24 bit identification code comprising 2^24 options.
A Keyfob has to be recognized and registered by the LightSYS2, therefore, a "write"
process must be performed.
A valid Keyfob is one "Learned" by the panel and allowing Arm/Disarm
A non valid Keyfob is one not "Learned" by the panel and not allowing Arm/Disarm.

Page 251
EN 50131 and EN 50136 Compliance

System Monitoring
The main unit is monitored for AC trouble, battery fault, low battery and more.
All other wireless elements are monitored for low voltage battery.

Setting the LightSYS™2 to comply with EN 50131 requirements

1. Access the Installer programming mode.
2. From the [1] System menu select [5] to access the Settings menu.
3. From the Settings menu select [4] to access the Standard option.
4. Select EN 50131. Once selected, the following changes will occur in the LightSYS™2
software:

Feature EN 50131 Compliance

Timers Quick Key Required Value:
Phone Line cut delay   Immediate (0 minutes)
Entry Delay , 45 seconds (maximum
 allowed)
AC Delay  Immediate (0 minutes)
Jamming Time  0 minutes
RX Supervision  2 hours

System Controls Quick Key

Quick Arm   Set to NO
False Code Trouble   Set to Yes
Forced Arming   Set to NO
Authorize installer   Set to YES
Override Trouble   Set to NO
Restore Alarm   Set to YES
Mandatory Event Log   Set to YES
Restore Trouble   Set to YES
Exit Alarm   Set to NO
Entry Alarm   Set to YES
20 minutes signal   Set to YES
Attenuation   Set to YES
• After Level 2, 3 or 4 users (users with access codes) are no longer accessing the
system, indications are made inaccessible to Level 1 users (users who don’t have a
code) by the display showing only "Enter code:"

Page 252
 EN 50131 and EN 50136 Compliance

• After entering 3 invalid user codes, an 'invalid code' signal will be alerted to the
receiving centre and recorded in the event log. The invalid code will continue to
alert in the system until restored by a user with a code.

Page 253
Remote Software Upgrade

Appendix I Remote Software Upgrade

This appendix explains how to perform remote upgrade of your LightSYS™2 main panel
software using the LightSYS™2 keypad or SMS command. Remote software upgrade is
performed via IP or GPRS.
Notes:
1. It is recommended to perform the upgrade process from keypad 1 (Not wireless keypad)
2. Software upgrade does not delete all previous parameters of the panel

Step 1: Set parameters for IP/GPRS Communication

1. Define all parameters required to set GPRS or IP communication as explained in the
Communication section of the LightSYS™2 (See page 145).

Step 2: Enter the location of the upgrade file

1. In the  System menu,  Firmware Upgrade submenu, enter the relevant
information regarding the location of the upgrade file:
 Server IP: Enter the IP address of the router/gateway where the upgrade file
is located.
Default: firmware.riscogroup.com
 Port: Enter the port on the router/gateway where the upgrade file is located.
Default: 00080
 File Name: Enter the upgrade file name. Default: CMD.TXT
Notes:
1. The File Name is case sensitive
2. Please contact Customer Support services for the file name parameters.

Step 3: Activate Remote Upgrade from the Keypad

1. From the installer main programming menu select  System menu,  Firmware
Upgrade submenu  Download File option.
2. Select the upgrade communication path as follows:
 Via IP
 Via GPRS

Page 254
 Remote Software Upgrade

Notes:
Each option appears only if the relevant module (IP or GPRS module) is
installed in the system.
If your panel is equipped with an IP or GSM module you can start the
download file procedure by sending an SMS command to the panel in the
following format:
(If address and port are configured and updated)
a. Via IP 97239637777IPFILE.
b. Via GSM (GPRS) 97239637777GSMFILE.
(Address and port can be added to the SMS command string as per the
following. If specified, these parameters also override any existing panel
settings)
a. Via IP 97239637777IPFILE10.10.10.6:80.
b. Via GSM (GPRS) 97239637777GSMFILE212.150.25.223:80.

3. Once selected, the LightSYS™2 will start downloading the required files. The
upgrade procedure may take approximately 40 minutes to complete. This will vary
according to whether the procedure is performed via GPRS or IP. Once the files are
downloaded the panel automatically starts with the upgrade procedure of the units
connected to the system.
Note:
1. During the upgrade process of the panel firmware there will be no display on the
keypad.
2. While downloading the files for the upgrade procedure the STATUS green LED
on the main panel will flash slowly. When the upgrade procedure starts it will
start to flask rapidly.

Step 4: Verify that upgrade has been successful

1. From the main display press and enter the installer code followed by .
2. Using the arrows scroll to Maintenance> Diagnostics> Main panel>Version. The
upgraded version of the main panel will appear.
3. To view the other accessories version navigate to the required menus under the
Maintenance> Diagnostics menu.
Note:
If upgrade has failed the previous software version of the main panel / accessory
version will appear.

Page 255
FCC Note
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.

FCC Warning
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference
caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment. Such
modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

RED Compliance Statement

Hereby, RISCO Group declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. For the CE Declaration
of Conformity please refer to our website: www.riscogroup.com

Page 256
Standard Limited Product Warranty (“Limited Warranty”)
RISCO Ltd. (“RISCO") guarantee RISCO’s hardware products (“Products”) to be free from defects in
materials and workmanship when used and stored under normal conditions and in accordance with the
instructions for use supplied by RISCO, for a period of (i) 24 months from the date of delivery of the
Product (the “Warranty Period”). This Limited Warranty covers the Product only within the country
where the Product was originally purchased and only covers Products purchased as new.
Contact with customers only. This Limited Warranty is solely for the benefit of customers who
purchased the Products directly from RISCO or from an authorized distributor of RISCO. RISCO does not
warrant the Product to consumers and nothing in this Warranty obligates RISCO to accept Product
returns directly from end users who purchased the Products for their own use from RISCO’s customer or
from any installer of RISCO, or otherwise provide warranty or other services to any such end user
directly. RISCO’s authorized distributor or installer shall handle all interactions with its end users in
connection with this Limited Warranty. RISCO’s authorized distributor or installer shall make no
warranties, representations, guarantees or statements to its end users or other third parties that suggest
that RISCO has any warranty or service obligation to, or any contractual privy with, any recipient of a
Product.
Remedies. In the event that a material defect in a Product is discovered and reported to RISCO during
the Warranty Period, RISCO shall accept return of the defective Product in accordance with the below
RMA procedure and, at its option, either (i) repair or have repaired the defective Product, or (ii) provide a
replacement product to the customer.
Return Material Authorization. In the event that you need to return your Product for repair or
replacement, RISCO will provide you with a Return Merchandise Authorization Number (RMA#) as well
as return instructions. Do not return your Product without prior approval from RISCO. Any Product
returned without a valid, unique RMA# will be refused and returned to the sender at the sender’s
expense. The returned Product must be accompanied with a detailed description of the defect discovered
(“Defect Description”) and must otherwise follow RISCO’s then-current RMA procedure published in
RISCO’s website at www.riscogroup.com in connection with any such return. If RISCO determines in its
reasonable discretion that any Product returned by customer conforms to the applicable warranty (“Non-
Defective Product”), RISCO will notify the customer of such determination and will return the applicable
Product to customer at customer’s expense. In addition, RISCO may propose and assess customer a
charge for testing and examination of Non-Defective Product.
Entire Liability. The repair or replacement of Products in accordance with this Limited Warranty shall be
RISCO’s entire liability and customer’s sole and exclusive remedy in case a material defect in a Product is
discovered and reported as required herein. RISCO’s obligation and this Limited Warranty are contingent
upon the full payment by customer for such Product and upon a proven weekly testing and examination
of the Product functionality.

Page 257
Limitations. This Limited Warranty is the only warranty made by RISCO with respect to the Products.
The warranty is not transferable to any third party. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law,
this Limited Warranty shall not apply and will be void if: (i) the conditions set forth above are not met
(including, but not limited to, full payment by customer for the Product and a proven weekly testing and
examination of the Product functionality); (ii) if the Products or any part or component thereof: (a) have
been subjected to improper operation or installation; (b) have been subject to neglect, abuse, willful
damage, abnormal working conditions, failure to follow RISCO’s instructions (whether oral or in
writing); (c) have been misused, altered, modified or repaired without RISCO’s written approval or
combined with, or installed on products, or equipment of the customer or of any third party; (d) have
been damaged by any factor beyond RISCO’s reasonable control such as, but not limited to, power
failure, electric power surges, or unsuitable third party components and the interaction of software
therewith or (e) any failure or delay in the performance of the Product attributable to any means of
communication provided by any third party service provider, including, but not limited to, GSM
interruptions, lack of or internet outage and/or telephony failure. BATTERIES ARE EXPLICITLY
EXCLUDED FROM THE WARRANTY AND RISCO SHALL NOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE
IN RELATION THERETO, AND THE ONLY WARRANTY APPLICABLE THERETO, IF ANY, IS THE
BATTERY MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY. RISCO does not install or integrate the Product in the end
user’s security system and is therefore not responsible for and cannot guarantee the performance of the
end user’s security system which uses the Product or which the Product is a component of.
This Limited Warranty applies only to Products manufactured by or for RISCO. Further, this Limited
Warranty does not apply to any software (including operating system) added to or provided with the
Products or any third-party software, even if packaged or sold with the RISCO Product. Manufacturers,
suppliers, or third parties other than RISCO may provide their own warranties, but RISCO, to the extent
permitted by law and except as otherwise specifically set forth herein, provides its Products “AS IS”.
Software and applications distributed or made available by RISCO in conjunction with the Product (with
or without the RISCO brand), including, but not limited to system software, as well as P2P services or
any other service made available by RISCO in relation to the Product, are not covered under this Limited
Warranty. Refer to the Terms of Service at: https://riscocloud.com/ELAS/WebUI/UserLogin/License for
details of your rights and obligations with respect to the use of such applications, software or any service.
RISCO does not represent that the Product may not be compromised or circumvented; that the Product
will prevent any personal injury or property loss by burglary, robbery, fire or otherwise, or that the
Product will in all cases provide adequate warning or protection. A properly installed and maintained
alarm may only reduce the risk of a burglary, robbery or fire without warning, but it is not insurance or a
guarantee that such will not occur or will not cause or lead to personal injury or property loss.
CONSEQUENTLY, RISCO SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY, PROPERTY
DAMAGE OR OTHER LOSS BASED ON ANY CLAIM AT ALL INCLUDING A CLAIM THAT THE
PRODUCT FAILED TO GIVE WARNING.

Page 258
EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH HEREIN, RISCO AND ITS LICENSORS HEREBY
DISCLAIM ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES,
GUARANTEES, AND CONDITIONS WITH REGARD TO THE PRODUCTS, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AND CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND WARRANTIES
AGAINST HIDDEN OR LATENT DEFECTS, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. WITHOUT
LIMITING THE GENERALITY OF THE FOREGOING, RISCO AND ITS LICENSORS DO NOT
REPRESENT OR WARRANT THAT: (I) THE OPERATION OR USE OF THE PRODUCT WILL BE
TIMELY, SECURE, UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE; (ii) THAT ANY FILES, CONTENT OR
INFORMATION OF ANY KIND THAT MAY BE ACCESSED THROUGH THE PRODUCT SHALL
REMAIN SECURED OR NON DAMAGED. CUSTOMER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT NEITHER RISCO
NOR ITS LICENSORS CONTROL THE TRANSFER OF DATA OVER COMMUNICATIONS FACILITIES,
INCLUDING THE INTERNET, GSM OR OTHER MEANS OF COMMUNICATIONS AND THAT
RISCO’S PRODUCTS, MAY BE SUBJECT TO LIMITATIONS, DELAYS, AND OTHER PROBLEMS
INHERENT IN THE USE OF SUCH MEANS OF COMMUNICATIONS. RISCO IS NOT RESPONSIBLE
FOR ANY DELAYS, DELIVERY FAILURES, OR OTHER DAMAGE RESULTING FROM SUCH
PROBLEMS. RISCO WARRANTS THAT ITS PRODUCTS DO NOT, TO THE BEST OF ITS
KNOWLEDGE, INFRINGE UPON ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT, TRADEMARK, TRADE SECRET OR
OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT IN ANY EVENT RISCO SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOST REVENUES OR PROFITS, PUNITIVE DAMAGES, OR FOR
ANY OTHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF THEY
WERE FORESEEABLE OR RISCO HAS BEEN INFORMED OF THEIR POTENTIAL.

Page 259
 Contacting RISCO Group
RISCO Group is committed to customer service and product support. You can contact us
through our website (www.riscogroup.com) or at the following telephone and fax numbers:

Australia Italy
Tel: + 1-800-991-542 Tel: +39-02-66590054
E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

Belgium (Benelux) Spain

Tel: +32-2522-7622 Tel: +34-91-490-2133
E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

China (Shanghai) United Kingdom

Tel: +86-21-52-39-0066 Tel: +44-(0)-161-655-5500
E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

France USA
Tel: +33-164-73-28-50 Tel: +1-631-719-4400
E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

Israel
Tel: +972-3-963-7777
E-mail: [email protected]

No part of this document may be reproduced in any form without prior written permission
from the publisher.

© RISCO Group 11/2017. All rights reserved. 5IN2048 E

Page 260